三藏之路 Tipitaka Path
巴利三藏 · 玛欣德尊者标准中译
首页经藏中部后五十部4. 分别品

4. Vibhaṅgavaggo4. 分别品

387 段 · CSCD 巴利原典
4. Vibhaṅgavaggo4. 分别品
1. Bhaddekarattasuttaṃ1. 一夜贤者经
§272
Evaṃ me sutaṃ – ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti. ‘‘Bhadante’’ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṃ. Bhagavā etadavoca – ‘‘bhaddekarattassa vo, bhikkhave, uddesañca vibhaṅgañca desessāmi. Taṃ suṇātha, sādhukaṃ manasi karotha; bhāsissāmī’’ti. ‘‘Evaṃ, bhante’’ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṃ. Bhagavā etadavoca –
如是我闻——一时,世尊住在沙瓦提城揭德林给孤独园。在那里,世尊称呼比库们:「诸比库。」「尊者。」那些比库回答世尊。世尊说此:「诸比库,我将为你们教导善一夜者的总说与详说。你们听此,善作意;我将说。」「是的,尊者。」那些比库回答世尊。世尊说此:
‘‘Atītaṃ nānvāgameyya, nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṃ;
「不应追逐过去,不应期待未来;
Yadatītaṃ pahīnaṃ taṃ, appattañca anāgataṃ.
「过去的已舍断,未来的未到达。
‘‘Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṃ, tattha tattha vipassati;
「现在的法,于此处此处观察;
Asaṃhīraṃ asaṃkuppaṃ, taṃ vidvā manubrūhaye.
「不动摇、不震动,了知此而增长。
‘‘Ajjeva kiccamātappaṃ , ko jaññā maraṇaṃ suve;
「今日即应热诚于应作,谁知明日死亡?
Na hi no saṅgaraṃ tena, mahāsenena maccunā.
「确实,我们与彼大军死神无协议。
‘‘Evaṃ vihāriṃ ātāpiṃ, ahorattamatanditaṃ;
「如此住,热诚者,日夜不懈怠;
Taṃ ve bhaddekarattoti, santo ācikkhate muni’’ .
寂静的牟尼宣说那确实是「贤善一夜者」。
§273
‘‘Kathañca , bhikkhave, atītaṃ anvāgameti? ‘Evaṃrūpo ahosiṃ atītamaddhāna’nti tattha nandiṃ samanvāneti, ‘evaṃvedano ahosiṃ atītamaddhāna’nti tattha nandiṃ samanvāneti, ‘evaṃsañño ahosiṃ atītamaddhāna’nti tattha nandiṃ samanvāneti, ‘evaṃsaṅkhāro ahosiṃ atītamaddhāna’nti tattha nandiṃ samanvāneti, ‘evaṃviññāṇo ahosiṃ atītamaddhāna’nti tattha nandiṃ samanvāneti – evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, atītaṃ anvāgameti.
「诸比库,如何追逐过去?『我在过去时是这样的色』,于此随寻喜;『我在过去时是这样的受』,于此随寻喜;『我在过去时是这样的想』,于此随寻喜;『我在过去时是这样的行』,于此随寻喜;『我在过去时是这样的识』,于此随寻喜——诸比库,如此追逐过去。
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, atītaṃ nānvāgameti? ‘Evaṃrūpo ahosiṃ atītamaddhāna’nti tattha nandiṃ na samanvāneti, ‘evaṃvedano ahosiṃ atītamaddhāna’nti tattha nandiṃ na samanvāneti, ‘evaṃsañño ahosiṃ atītamaddhāna’nti tattha nandiṃ na samanvāneti, ‘evaṃsaṅkhāro ahosiṃ atītamaddhāna’nti tattha nandiṃ na samanvāneti, ‘evaṃviññāṇo ahosiṃ atītamaddhāna’nti tattha nandiṃ na samanvāneti – evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, atītaṃ nānvāgameti.
「诸比库,如何不追逐过去?『我在过去时是这样的色』,于此不随寻喜;『我在过去时是这样的受』,于此不随寻喜;『我在过去时是这样的想』,于此不随寻喜;『我在过去时是这样的行』,于此不随寻喜;『我在过去时是这样的识』,于此不随寻喜——诸比库,如此不追逐过去。
§274
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, anāgataṃ paṭikaṅkhati? ‘Evaṃrūpo siyaṃ anāgatamaddhāna’nti tattha nandiṃ samanvāneti, evaṃvedano siyaṃ…pe… evaṃsañño siyaṃ… evaṃsaṅkhāro siyaṃ… evaṃviññāṇo siyaṃ anāgatamaddhānanti tattha nandiṃ samanvāneti – evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, anāgataṃ paṭikaṅkhati.
「诸比库,如何期待未来?『我在未来时将是这样的色』,于此随寻喜;『我在未来时将是这样的受』……『我在未来时将是这样的想』……『我在未来时将是这样的行』……『我在未来时将是这样的识』,于此随寻喜——诸比库,如此期待未来。
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, anāgataṃ nappaṭikaṅkhati? ‘Evaṃrūpo siyaṃ anāgatamaddhāna’nti tattha nandiṃ na samanvāneti, evaṃvedano siyaṃ … evaṃsañño siyaṃ… evaṃsaṅkhāro siyaṃ… ‘evaṃviññāṇo siyaṃ anāgatamaddhāna’nti tattha nandiṃ na samanvāneti – evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, anāgataṃ nappaṭikaṅkhati.
「诸比库,如何不期待未来?『我在未来时将是这样的色』,于此不随寻喜;『我在未来时将是这样的受』……『我在未来时将是这样的想』……『我在未来时将是这样的行』……『我在未来时将是这样的识』,于此不随寻喜——诸比库,如此不期待未来。
§275
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṃhīrati? Idha, bhikkhave, assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṃ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido ariyadhamme avinīto sappurisānaṃ adassāvī sappurisadhammassa akovido sappurisadhamme avinīto rūpaṃ attato samanupassati, rūpavantaṃ vā attānaṃ, attani vā rūpaṃ, rūpasmiṃ vā attānaṃ; vedanaṃ…pe… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassati, viññāṇavantaṃ vā attānaṃ attani vā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇasmiṃ vā attānaṃ – evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṃhīrati.
「诸比库,如何于现在诸法被夺去?诸比库,于此,未受教导的凡夫,不见诸圣者,不熟练圣法,未受圣法调御,不见诸善人,不熟练善人法,未受善人法调御,随观色为我,或随观我为有色者,或随观色在我中,或随观我在色中;随观受……随观想……随观诸行……随观识为我,或随观我为有识者,或随观识在我中,或随观我在识中——诸比库,如此于现在诸法被夺去。
‘‘Kathañca , bhikkhave, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṃhīrati? Idha, bhikkhave, sutavā ariyasāvako ariyānaṃ dassāvī ariyadhammassa kovido ariyadhamme suvinīto sappurisānaṃ dassāvī sappurisadhammassa kovido sappurisadhamme suvinīto na rūpaṃ attato samanupassati, na rūpavantaṃ vā attānaṃ, na attani vā rūpaṃ, na rūpasmiṃ vā attānaṃ; na vedanaṃ… na saññaṃ… na saṅkhāre… na viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassati, na viññāṇavantaṃ vā attānaṃ, na attani vā viññāṇaṃ, na viññāṇasmiṃ vā attānaṃ – evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṃhīrati.
「诸比库,如何于现在诸法不被夺去?诸比库,于此,多闻的圣弟子,见诸圣者,熟练圣法,善受圣法调御,见诸善人,熟练善人法,善受善人法调御,不随观色为我,不随观我为有色者,不随观色在我中,不随观我在色中;不随观受……不随观想……不随观诸行……不随观识为我,不随观我为有识者,不随观识在我中,不随观我在识中——诸比库,如此于现在诸法不被夺去。
‘‘Atītaṃ nānvāgameyya, nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṃ;
「不应追逐过去,不应期待未来;
Yadatītaṃ pahīnaṃ taṃ, appattañca anāgataṃ.
过去已舍断,未来未到达。
‘‘Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṃ, tattha tattha vipassati;
对于现在法,于彼彼处观。
Asaṃhīraṃ asaṃkuppaṃ, taṃ vidvā manubrūhaye.
不动不可动,智者应增长。
‘‘Ajjeva kiccamātappaṃ, ko jaññā maraṇaṃ suve;
今日应勤作,谁知明日死?
Na hi no saṅgaraṃ tena, mahāsenena maccunā.
确实与彼死,大军无和约。
‘‘Evaṃ vihāriṃ ātāpiṃ, ahorattamatanditaṃ;
如是住热诚,日夜不懈怠。
Taṃ ve bhaddekarattoti, santo ācikkhate munī’’ti.
寂静牟尼说,彼为善一夜。
‘‘‘Bhaddekarattassa vo, bhikkhave, uddesañca vibhaṅgañca desessāmī’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ idametaṃ paṭicca vutta’’nti.
「诸比库!我将为你们讲说善一夜的总说与详说」——凡如此所说者,缘于此而说。
Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti.
世尊如是说。那些比库们心满意足,欢喜世尊所说。
Bhaddekarattasuttaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ paṭhamaṃ. · 一夜贤者经完 第一
2. Ānandabhaddekarattasuttaṃ2. 阿难一夜贤者经
§276
Evaṃ me sutaṃ – ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā ānando upaṭṭhānasālāyaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dhammiyā kathāya sandasseti samādapeti samuttejeti sampahaṃseti, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca bhāsati.
如是我闻——一时,世尊住在沙瓦提城揭德林给孤独园。尔时,具寿阿难陀在侍者堂以法谈向诸比库开示、劝导、鼓励、使之欢喜,宣说善一夜者的总说与详说。
Atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṃ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yenupaṭṭhānasālā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘ko nu kho, bhikkhave, upaṭṭhānasālāyaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṃsesi, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca abhāsī’’ti? ‘‘Āyasmā, bhante, ānando upaṭṭhānasālāyaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṃsesi, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca abhāsī’’ti.
那时,世尊在傍晚时分从独坐中起来,前往侍者堂;抵达后,在已设的座位上坐下。坐下后,世尊对诸比库说:「诸比库,是谁在侍者堂以法谈向诸比库开示、劝导、鼓励、使之欢喜,宣说了善一夜者的总说与详说?」「尊者,是具寿阿难陀在侍者堂以法谈向诸比库开示、劝导、鼓励、使之欢喜,宣说了善一夜者的总说与详说。」
Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ āmantesi – ‘‘yathā kathaṃ pana tvaṃ, ānanda, bhikkhūnaṃ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṃsesi , bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca abhāsī’’ti? ‘‘Evaṃ kho ahaṃ, bhante, bhikkhūnaṃ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesiṃ samādapesiṃ samuttejesiṃ sampahaṃsesiṃ, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca abhāsiṃ –
那时,世尊对具寿阿难陀说:「阿难陀,你是如何以法谈向诸比库开示、劝导、鼓励、使之欢喜,宣说善一夜者的总说与详说的?」「尊者,我是这样以法谈向诸比库开示、劝导、鼓励、使之欢喜,宣说善一夜者的总说与详说的——
‘‘Atītaṃ nānvāgameyya, nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṃ;
「不应追逐过去,不应期待未来;
Yadatītaṃ pahīnaṃ taṃ, appattañca anāgataṃ.
「过去的已舍弃,未来的未到达。
‘‘Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṃ, tattha tattha vipassati;
「对于现在的法,于彼彼处观照;
Asaṃhīraṃ asaṃkuppaṃ, taṃ vidvā manubrūhaye.
「不动摇、不动乱,知此而修习。」
‘‘Ajjeva kiccamātappaṃ, ko jaññā maraṇaṃ suve;
「今日即应作努力,谁知明日有死亡;
Na hi no saṅgaraṃ tena, mahāsenena maccunā.
我们与彼大军死神,确实无有和解。
‘‘Evaṃ vihāriṃ ātāpiṃ, ahorattamatanditaṃ;
如此住于热诚者,日夜不懈怠,
Taṃ ve bhaddekarattoti, santo ācikkhate muni’’.
寂静的牟尼说:彼确实是善一夜者。」
§277
‘‘Kathañca, āvuso, atītaṃ anvāgameti? Evaṃrūpo ahosiṃ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṃ samanvāneti, evaṃvedano ahosiṃ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṃ samanvāneti, evaṃsañño ahosiṃ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṃ samanvāneti, evaṃsaṅkhāro ahosiṃ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṃ samanvāneti, evaṃviññāṇo ahosiṃ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṃ samanvāneti – evaṃ kho, āvuso, atītaṃ anvāgameti.
「诸友,如何追逐过去?『我在过去时是这样的色』,于此随伴欢喜;『我在过去时是这样的受』,于此随伴欢喜;『我在过去时是这样的想』,于此随伴欢喜;『我在过去时是这样的行』,于此随伴欢喜;『我在过去时是这样的识』,于此随伴欢喜——诸友,如此追逐过去。
‘‘Kathañca, āvuso, atītaṃ nānvāgameti? Evaṃrūpo ahosiṃ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṃ na samanvāneti, evaṃvedano ahosiṃ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṃ na samanvāneti, evaṃsañño ahosiṃ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṃ na samanvāneti, evaṃsaṅkhāro ahosiṃ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṃ na samanvāneti, evaṃviññāṇo ahosiṃ atītamaddhānanti tattha nandiṃ na samanvāneti – evaṃ kho, āvuso, atītaṃ nānvāgameti.
「诸友,如何不追逐过去?『我在过去时是这样的色』,于此不随伴欢喜;『我在过去时是这样的受』,于此不随伴欢喜;『我在过去时是这样的想』,于此不随伴欢喜;『我在过去时是这样的行』,于此不随伴欢喜;『我在过去时是这样的识』,于此不随伴欢喜——诸友,如此不追逐过去。
‘‘Kathañca, āvuso, anāgataṃ paṭikaṅkhati? Evaṃrūpo siyaṃ anāgatamaddhānanti tattha nandiṃ samanvāneti, evaṃvedano siyaṃ…pe… evaṃsañño siyaṃ… evaṃsaṅkhāro siyaṃ… evaṃviññāṇo siyaṃ anāgatamaddhānanti tattha nandiṃ samanvāneti – evaṃ kho, āvuso, anāgataṃ paṭikaṅkhati.
「诸友,如何期待未来?『我在未来时将是这样的色』,于此随伴欢喜;『我在未来时将是这样的受』……『我在未来时将是这样的想』……『我在未来时将是这样的行』……『我在未来时将是这样的识』,于此随伴欢喜——诸友,如此期待未来。
‘‘Kathañca, āvuso, anāgataṃ nappaṭikaṅkhati? Evaṃrūpo siyaṃ anāgatamaddhānanti tattha nandiṃ na samanvāneti, evaṃvedano siyaṃ…pe… evaṃsañño siyaṃ… evaṃsaṅkhāro siyaṃ… evaṃviññāṇo siyaṃ anāgatamaddhānanti tattha nandiṃ na samanvāneti – evaṃ kho, āvuso, anāgataṃ nappaṭikaṅkhati.
「诸友,如何不期待未来?『我在未来时将是这样的色』,于此不随伴欢喜;『我在未来时将是这样的受』……『我在未来时将是这样的想』……『我在未来时将是这样的行』……『我在未来时将是这样的识』,于此不随伴欢喜——诸友,如此不期待未来。
‘‘Kathañca, āvuso, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṃhīrati? Idha, āvuso, assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṃ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido ariyadhamme avinīto sappurisānaṃ adassāvī sappurisadhammassa akovido sappurisadhamme avinīto rūpaṃ attato samanupassati, rūpavantaṃ vā attānaṃ, attani vā rūpaṃ, rūpasmiṃ vā attānaṃ; vedanaṃ… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassati, viññāṇavantaṃ vā attānaṃ, attani vā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇasmiṃ vā attānaṃ – evaṃ kho, āvuso, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṃhīrati.
「诸友,如何于现在诸法动摇?诸友,于此,未受教的凡夫,不见圣者,不熟练圣法,未受圣法调御,不见善人,不熟练善人法,未受善人法调御,随观色为我,或我拥有色,或色在我中,或我在色中;随观受……想……行……随观识为我,或我拥有识,或识在我中,或我在识中——诸友,如此于现在诸法动摇。」
‘‘Kathañca , āvuso, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṃhīrati? Idha, āvuso, sutavā ariyasāvako ariyānaṃ dassāvī ariyadhammassa kovido ariyadhamme suvinīto sappurisānaṃ dassāvī sappurisadhammassa kovido sappurisadhamme suvinīto na rūpaṃ attato samanupassati, na rūpavantaṃ vā attānaṃ, na attani vā rūpaṃ, na rūpasmiṃ vā attānaṃ; na vedanaṃ… na saññaṃ… na saṅkhāre… na viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassati, na viññāṇavantaṃ vā attānaṃ, na attani vā viññāṇaṃ, na viññāṇasmiṃ vā attānaṃ – evaṃ kho, āvuso, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṃhīrati.
「诸友,如何于现在诸法不动摇?诸友,于此,多闻的圣弟子,见圣者,熟练圣法,善受圣法调御,见善人,熟练善人法,善受善人法调御,不随观色为我,不随观我拥有色,不随观色在我中,不随观我在色中;不随观受……想……行……不随观识为我,不随观我拥有识,不随观识在我中,不随观我在识中——诸友,如此于现在诸法不动摇。」
‘‘Atītaṃ nānvāgameyya, nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṃ;
「不应追逐过去,不应期待未来;」
Yadatītaṃ pahīnaṃ taṃ, appattañca anāgataṃ.
「过去的已舍断,未来的未到达。」
‘‘Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṃ, tattha tattha vipassati;
「对于现在的法,于其处其处观照;」
Asaṃhīraṃ asaṃkuppaṃ, taṃ vidvā manubrūhaye.
「不动摇、不动摇,了知它而修习。」
‘‘Ajjeva kiccamātappaṃ, ko jaññā maraṇaṃ suve;
「今日应作精勤,谁知明日死亡?」
Na hi no saṅgaraṃ tena, mahāsenena maccunā.
「确实我们不与彼,大军的死神和解。」
‘‘Evaṃ vihāriṃ ātāpiṃ, ahorattamatanditaṃ;
「如此住、热诚者,日夜不懈怠;
Taṃ ve bhaddekarattoti, santo ācikkhate munī’’ti.
寂静的牟尼说他确实是『一夜贤善者』。」
‘‘Evaṃ kho ahaṃ, bhante, bhikkhūnaṃ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesiṃ samādapesiṃ samuttejesiṃ sampahaṃsesiṃ, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca abhāsi’’nti.
「尊者,我如此以如法之语向诸比库开示、劝导、鼓励、使之欢喜,宣说了一夜贤善的总说与详说。」
§278
‘‘Sādhu , sādhu, ānanda! Sādhu kho tvaṃ, ānanda, bhikkhūnaṃ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesi samādapesi samuttejesi sampahaṃsesi, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca abhāsi –
「善哉,善哉,阿难!阿难,你善哉地以如法之语向诸比库开示、劝导、鼓励、使之欢喜,宣说了一夜贤善的总说与详说——
‘‘Atītaṃ nānvāgameyya…pe…
「不应追逐过去……(中略)……
Taṃ ve bhaddekarattoti, santo ācikkhate munī’’ti.
寂静的牟尼说他确实是『一夜贤善者』。」
‘‘Kathañca, ānanda, atītaṃ anvāgameti…pe… evaṃ kho, ānanda, atītaṃ anvāgameti. Kathañca, ānanda, atītaṃ nānvāgameti…pe… evaṃ kho, ānanda, atītaṃ nānvāgameti. Kathañca, ānanda, anāgataṃ paṭikaṅkhati…pe… evaṃ kho, ānanda, anāgataṃ paṭikaṅkhati. Kathañca, ānanda, anāgataṃ nappaṭikaṅkhati…pe… evaṃ kho, ānanda, anāgataṃ nappaṭikaṅkhati. Kathañca, ānanda, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṃhīrati…pe… evaṃ kho, ānanda, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṃhīrati. Kathañca, ānanda, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṃhīrati…pe… evaṃ kho, ānanda, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṃhīrati.
「阿难,如何追逐过去……(中略)……阿难,如此追逐过去。阿难,如何不追逐过去……(中略)……阿难,如此不追逐过去。阿难,如何期待未来……(中略)……阿难,如此期待未来。阿难,如何不期待未来……(中略)……阿难,如此不期待未来。阿难,如何于现在诸法被征服……(中略)……阿难,如此于现在诸法被征服。阿难,如何于现在诸法不被征服……(中略)……阿难,如此于现在诸法不被征服。
‘‘Atītaṃ nānvāgameyya…pe…
「不应追逐过去……(中略)……
Taṃ ve bhaddekarattoti, santo ācikkhate munī’’ti.
寂静者牟尼说此为「善一夜者」。
Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā ānando bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandīti.
世尊如是说。具寿阿难满意欢喜世尊所说。
Ānandabhaddekarattasuttaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ dutiyaṃ. · 阿难一夜贤者经完 第二
3. Mahākaccānabhaddekarattasuttaṃ3. 玛哈咖吒那一夜贤者经
§279
Evaṃ me sutaṃ – ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā rājagahe viharati tapodārāme. Atha kho āyasmā samiddhi rattiyā paccūsasamayaṃ paccuṭṭhāya yena tapodo tenupasaṅkami gattāni parisiñcituṃ. Tapode gattāni parisiñcitvā paccuttaritvā ekacīvaro aṭṭhāsi gattāni pubbāpayamāno . Atha kho aññatarā devatā abhikkantāya rattiyā abhikkantavaṇṇā kevalakappaṃ tapodaṃ obhāsetvā yenāyasmā samiddhi tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṃ ṭhitā kho sā devatā āyasmantaṃ samiddhiṃ etadavoca – ‘‘dhāresi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañcā’’ti? ‘‘Na kho ahaṃ, āvuso, dhāremi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Tvaṃ panāvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañcā’’ti? ‘‘Ahampi kho, bhikkhu, na dhāremi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Dhāresi pana tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’’ti? ‘‘Na kho ahaṃ, āvuso, dhāremi bhaddekarattiyo gāthāti. Tvaṃ panāvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’’ti? ‘‘Ahampi kho, bhikkhu na dhāremi bhaddekarattiyo gāthāti. Uggaṇhāhi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca; pariyāpuṇāhi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca; dhārehi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Atthasaṃhito, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddeso ca vibhaṅgo ca ādibrahmacariyako’’ti. Idamavoca sā devatā; idaṃ vatvā tatthevantaradhāyi.
如是我闻——一时,世尊住在王舍城温泉园。尔时,具寿沙密地于夜晚破晓时分起身,前往温泉处以沐浴肢体。在温泉处沐浴肢体后上岸,着一衣而立,使肢体干燥。尔时,某位天人于深夜时分,以殊胜光彩照亮整个温泉园后,前往具寿沙密地处;抵达后,站立一旁。站立一旁的那位天人对具寿沙密地如是说——「比库,你受持善一夜者的总说与详说吗?」「贤友,我不受持善一夜者的总说与详说。贤友,那么你受持善一夜者的总说与详说吗?」「比库,我也不受持善一夜者的总说与详说。比库,那么你受持善一夜者的偈颂吗?」「贤友,我不受持善一夜者的偈颂。贤友,那么你受持善一夜者的偈颂吗?」「比库,我也不受持善一夜者的偈颂。比库,你应学习善一夜者的总说与详说;比库,你应通达善一夜者的总说与详说;比库,你应受持善一夜者的总说与详说。比库,善一夜者的总说与详说与义相应,是梵行之初。」那位天人如是说;说此后,即于彼处消失。
§280
Atha kho āyasmā samiddhi tassā rattiyā accayena yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Ekamantaṃ nisinno kho āyasmā samiddhi bhagavantaṃ etadavoca –
尔时,具寿沙密地于那夜过后,前往世尊处;抵达后,礼敬世尊,坐于一旁。坐于一旁的具寿沙密地对世尊如是说——
‘‘Idhāhaṃ, bhante, rattiyā paccūsasamayaṃ paccuṭṭhāya yena tapodo tenupasaṅkamiṃ gattāni parisiñcituṃ. Tapode gattāni parisiñcitvā paccuttaritvā ekacīvaro aṭṭhāsiṃ gattāni pubbāpayamāno. Atha kho bhante, aññatarā devatā abhikkantāya rattiyā abhikkantavaṇṇā kevalakappaṃ tapodaṃ obhāsetvā yenāhaṃ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṃ ṭhitā kho sā devatā maṃ etadavoca – ‘dhāresi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañcā’’’ti?
「尊者,于此,我于夜晚破晓时分起身,前往温泉处以沐浴肢体。在温泉处沐浴肢体后上岸,着一衣而立,使肢体干燥。尊者,尔时,某位天人于深夜时分,以殊胜光彩照亮整个温泉园后,前往我处;抵达后,站立一旁。站立一旁的那位天人对我如是说——『比库,你受持善一夜者的总说与详说吗?』」
‘‘Evaṃ vutte ahaṃ, bhante, taṃ devataṃ etadavocaṃ – ‘na kho ahaṃ, āvuso, dhāremi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Tvaṃ panāvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañcā’ti? ‘Ahampi kho, bhikkhu, na dhāremi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Dhāresi pana tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’ti? ‘Na kho ahaṃ, āvuso, dhāremi bhaddekarattiyo gāthāti. Tvaṃ panāvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’ti? ‘Ahampi kho, bhikkhu, na dhāremi bhaddekarattiyo gāthāti. Uggaṇhāhi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca; pariyāpuṇāhi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca; dhārehi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Atthasaṃhito, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddeso ca vibhaṅgo ca ādibrahmacariyako’ti. Idamavoca, bhante, sā devatā; idaṃ vatvā tatthevantaradhāyi. Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca desetū’’ti. ‘‘Tena hi, bhikkhu, suṇāhi, sādhukaṃ manasi karohi; bhāsissāmī’’ti. ‘‘Evaṃ, bhante’’ti kho āyasmā samiddhi bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca –
「尊者,如是说时,我对那位天人如是说——『贤友,我不受持善一夜者的总说与详说。贤友,那么你受持善一夜者的总说与详说吗?』『比库,我也不受持善一夜者的总说与详说。比库,那么你受持善一夜者的偈颂吗?』『贤友,我不受持善一夜者的偈颂。贤友,那么你受持善一夜者的偈颂吗?』『比库,我也不受持善一夜者的偈颂。比库,你应学习善一夜者的总说与详说;比库,你应通达善一夜者的总说与详说;比库,你应受持善一夜者的总说与详说。比库,善一夜者的总说与详说与义相应,是梵行之初。』尊者,那位天人如是说;说此后,即于彼处消失。尊者,请世尊为我开示善一夜者的总说与详说,那就好了!」「比库,那么你要听!你要善作意!我要说了。」「是的,尊者。」具寿沙密地回答世尊。世尊如是说——
‘‘Atītaṃ nānvāgameyya, nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṃ;
「不应追逐过去,不应期待未来;
Yadatītaṃ pahīnaṃ taṃ, appattañca anāgataṃ.
过去的已舍断,未来的未到达。
‘‘Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṃ, tattha tattha vipassati;
「凡对现在之法,于彼彼处观;
Asaṃhīraṃ asaṃkuppaṃ, taṃ vidvā manubrūhaye.
不动、不摇,知此后应修习。
‘‘Ajjeva kiccamātappaṃ, ko jaññā maraṇaṃ suve;
「今日即应作精勤,谁知明日死亡?
Na hi no saṅgaraṃ tena, mahāsenena maccunā.
确实我们与彼大军死神,无有协议。
‘‘Evaṃ vihāriṃ ātāpiṃ, ahorattamatanditaṃ;
「如此住、热诚者,日夜不懈怠;
Taṃ ve bhaddekarattoti, santo ācikkhate munī’’ti.
寂静的牟尼说彼为『善一夜者』。」
Idamavoca bhagavā; idaṃ vatvāna sugato uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ pāvisi. Atha kho tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ , acirapakkantassa bhagavato, etadahosi – ‘‘idaṃ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṃ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ paviṭṭho –
世尊说此;说此后,善逝从座起进入住处。那时,那些比库们在世尊离去不久,生起此念——「诸具寿,世尊对我们总说此教诫,未详细解释义理,即从座起进入住处——
‘‘Atītaṃ nānvāgameyya, nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṃ;
「不应追忆过去,不应期待未来;」
Yadatītaṃ pahīnaṃ taṃ, appattañca anāgataṃ.
过去已舍断,未来未到达。
‘‘Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṃ, tattha tattha vipassati;
对于现在法,于此于彼观。
Asaṃhīraṃ asaṃkuppaṃ, taṃ vidvā manubrūhaye.
不动不可动,智者应增长。
‘‘Ajjeva kiccamātappaṃ, ko jaññā maraṇaṃ suve;
今日应勤作,谁知明日死?
Na hi no saṅgaraṃ tena, mahāsenena maccunā.
确实无协议,与彼大军死。
‘‘Evaṃ vihāriṃ ātāpiṃ, ahorattamatanditaṃ;
如是住热诚,日夜不懈怠。
Taṃ ve bhaddekarattoti, santo ācikkhate munī’’ti.
彼为善一夜,寂静牟尼说。
‘‘Ko nu kho imassa bhagavatā saṃkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajeyyā’’ti?
谁能对世尊所总说之义,未详细分别论者,详细分别论其义?
Atha kho tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ etadahosi – ‘‘ayaṃ kho āyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṃvaṇṇito sambhāvito ca viññūnaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ; pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṃkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajituṃ. Yaṃnūna mayaṃ yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkameyyāma; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṃ mahākaccānaṃ etamatthaṃ paṭipuccheyyāmā’’ti.
那时,那些比库们这样想:「这位具寿马哈咖吒亚那既为导师所称赞,也为有智的同梵行者所尊重;具寿马哈咖吒亚那能够详细解释这世尊简略所说、未详细分别论其义的义理。让我们前往具寿马哈咖吒亚那处;前往后,向具寿马哈咖吒亚那询问此义。」
§281
Atha kho te bhikkhū yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkamiṃsu; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā mahākaccānena saddhiṃ sammodiṃsu. Sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ vītisāretvā ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Ekamantaṃ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū āyasmantaṃ mahākaccānaṃ etadavocuṃ – ‘‘idaṃ kho no, āvuso kaccāna, bhagavā saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṃ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ paviṭṭho –
那时,那些比库们前往具寿马哈咖吒亚那处;前往后,与具寿马哈咖吒亚那互相问候。交换了友好、值得忆念的话语后,在一旁坐下。在一旁坐下的那些比库们对具寿马哈咖吒亚那这样说:「贤友咖吒亚那,世尊为我们简略地说了这教诫,未详细分别论其义,从座起立,进入住处——
‘‘Atītaṃ nānvāgameyya…pe…
「不应追逐过去……(中略)……
Taṃ ve bhaddekarattoti, santo ācikkhate munī’’ti.
寂静者牟尼说此为一夜贤善。」
‘‘Tesaṃ no, āvuso kaccāna, amhākaṃ, acirapakkantassa bhagavato, etadahosi – idaṃ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṃ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ paviṭṭho –
「贤友咖吒亚那,世尊离去不久,我们这样想:『贤友们,世尊为我们简略地说了这教诫,未详细分别论其义,从座起立,进入住处——
‘‘Atītaṃ nānvāgameyya…pe…
「不应追逐过去……(中略)……
Taṃ ve bhaddekarattoti, santo ācikkhate munī’’ti.
寂静者牟尼说此为一夜贤善。」
‘‘Ko nu kho imassa bhagavatā saṃkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajeyyāti? Tesaṃ no , āvuso kaccāna, amhākaṃ etadahosi – ‘ayaṃ kho āyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṃvaṇṇito sambhāvito ca viññūnaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ. Pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṃkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajituṃ. Yaṃnūna mayaṃ yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkameyyāma; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṃ mahākaccānaṃ etamatthaṃ paṭipuccheyyāmā’ti. Vibhajatāyasmā mahākaccāno’’ti.
「谁能详细解释这世尊简略所说、未详细分别论其义的义理呢?」贤友咖吒亚那,我们这样想:『这位具寿马哈咖吒亚那既为导师所称赞,也为有智的同梵行者所尊重。具寿马哈咖吒亚那能够详细解释这世尊简略所说、未详细分别论其义的义理。让我们前往具寿马哈咖吒亚那处;前往后,向具寿马哈咖吒亚那询问此义。』请具寿马哈咖吒亚那解释。」
‘‘Seyyathāpi, āvuso, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṃ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva mūlaṃ atikkamma khandhaṃ sākhāpalāse sāraṃ pariyesitabbaṃ maññeyya; evaṃ sampadamidaṃ āyasmantānaṃ satthari sammukhībhūte taṃ bhagavantaṃ atisitvā amhe etamatthaṃ paṭipucchitabbaṃ maññatha . So hāvuso, bhagavā jānaṃ jānāti, passaṃ passati, cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto dhammabhūto brahmabhūto vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā amatassa dātā dhammassāmī tathāgato. So ceva panetassa kālo ahosi yaṃ bhagavantaṃyeva etamatthaṃ paṭipuccheyyātha, yathā vo bhagavā byākareyya tathā naṃ dhāreyyāthā’’ti.
「诸具寿,譬如一位需要心材、寻求心材、遍求心材的人,来到一棵有心材的大树前,越过根,越过树干,却认为应在枝叶中寻求心材;如是,诸具寿正是如此,当导师在面前时,越过彼世尊,却认为应向我们询问此义。诸具寿,彼世尊知而知、见而见,已成眼、已成智、已成法、已成梵,是说者、宣说者、义的引导者、不死的施与者、法主、如来。那正是应向世尊询问此义的时候,世尊如何分别论,你们应如是受持。」
‘‘Addhāvuso kaccāna, bhagavā jānaṃ jānāti, passaṃ passati, cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto dhammabhūto brahmabhūto vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā amatassa dātā dhammassāmī tathāgato. So ceva panetassa kālo ahosi yaṃ bhagavantaṃyeva etamatthaṃ paṭipuccheyyāma; yathā no bhagavā byākareyya tathā naṃ dhāreyyāma. Api cāyasmā mahākaccāno satthuceva saṃvaṇṇito sambhāvito ca viññūnaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ; pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṃkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajituṃ. Vibhajatāyasmā mahākaccāno agaruṃ karitvā’’ti .
「诸具寿咖吒亚那,确实,世尊知而知、见而见,已成眼、已成智、已成法、已成梵,是说者、宣说者、义的引导者、不死的施与者、法主、如来。那正是我们应向世尊询问此义的时候,世尊如何对我们分别论,我们应如是受持。然而,具寿摩诃咖吒亚那为导师所称赞,为诸有智的梵行同伴所尊重;具寿摩诃咖吒亚那能够详细分别论此世尊所总说、未详细分别论其义的义理。请具寿摩诃咖吒亚那分别论,不要以为麻烦。」
‘‘Tena hāvuso, suṇātha, sādhukaṃ manasi karotha; bhāsissāmī’’ti. ‘‘Evamāvuso’’ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato mahākaccānassa paccassosuṃ. Āyasmā mahākaccāno etadavoca –
「那么,诸具寿,你们听!善作意!我将说。」「是的,具寿。」那些比库回答具寿摩诃咖吒亚那。具寿摩诃咖吒亚那如此说——
‘‘Yaṃ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṃ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ paviṭṭho –
「诸具寿,世尊对我们总说此教诫,未详细分别论其义,从座起立,进入住处——
‘‘Atītaṃ nānvāgameyya…pe…
「不应追逐过去……(中略)……
Taṃ ve bhaddekarattoti, santo ācikkhate munī’’ti.
寂静者牟尼说:『那确实是善一夜者。』」
Imassa kho ahaṃ, āvuso, bhagavatā saṃkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa evaṃ vitthārena atthaṃ ājānāmi –
诸具寿,对于世尊所总说、未详细分别论其义的此教诫,我如此详细了知其义——
§282
‘‘Kathañca, āvuso, atītaṃ anvāgameti? Iti me cakkhu ahosi atītamaddhānaṃ iti rūpāti – tattha chandarāgappaṭibaddhaṃ hoti viññāṇaṃ, chandarāgappaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa tadabhinandati, tadabhinandanto atītaṃ anvāgameti. Iti me sotaṃ ahosi atītamaddhānaṃ iti saddāti…pe… iti me ghānaṃ ahosi atītamaddhānaṃ iti gandhāti… iti me jivhā ahosi atītamaddhānaṃ iti rasāti… iti me kāyo ahosi atītamaddhānaṃ iti phoṭṭhabbāti… iti me mano ahosi atītamaddhānaṃ iti dhammāti – tattha chandarāgappaṭibaddhaṃ hoti viññāṇaṃ, chandarāgappaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa tadabhinandati, tadabhinandanto atītaṃ anvāgameti – evaṃ kho, āvuso, atītaṃ anvāgameti.
「诸具寿,如何追逐过去?『我的眼在过去时』『色』——在那里,识被欲贪所系缚,因识被欲贪所系缚,他欢喜于彼,欢喜于彼者追逐过去。『我的耳在过去时』『声』……(中略)……『我的鼻在过去时』『香』……『我的舌在过去时』『味』……『我的身在过去时』『触』……『我的意在过去时』『法』——在那里,识被欲贪所系缚,因识被欲贪所系缚,他欢喜于彼,欢喜于彼者追逐过去——诸具寿,如是追逐过去。
‘‘Kathañca , āvuso, atītaṃ nānvāgameti? Iti me cakkhu ahosi atītamaddhānaṃ iti rūpāti – tattha na chandarāgappaṭibaddhaṃ hoti viññāṇaṃ, na chandarāgappaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa na tadabhinandati, na tadabhinandanto atītaṃ nānvāgameti. Iti me sotaṃ ahosi atītamaddhānaṃ iti saddāti…pe… iti me ghānaṃ ahosi atītamaddhānaṃ iti gandhāti… iti me jivhā ahosi atītamaddhānaṃ iti rasāti… iti me kāyo ahosi atītamaddhānaṃ iti phoṭṭhabbāti… iti me mano ahosi atītamaddhānaṃ iti dhammāti – tattha na chandarāgappaṭibaddhaṃ hoti viññāṇaṃ, na chandarāgappaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa, na tadabhinandati, na tadabhinandanto atītaṃ nānvāgameti – evaṃ kho, āvuso, atītaṃ nānvāgameti.
「诸友,如何不追忆过去?『我在过去时有眼』『有色』——在那里,识不被欲贪所系缚,由于识不被欲贪所系缚,他不欢喜于彼,不欢喜于彼者不追忆过去。『我在过去时有耳』『有声』……『我在过去时有鼻』『有香』……『我在过去时有舌』『有味』……『我在过去时有身』『有触』……『我在过去时有意』『有法』——在那里,识不被欲贪所系缚,由于识不被欲贪所系缚,他不欢喜于彼,不欢喜于彼者不追忆过去——诸友,如此不追忆过去。」
§283
‘‘Kathañca , āvuso, anāgataṃ paṭikaṅkhati? Iti me cakkhu siyā anāgatamaddhānaṃ iti rūpāti – appaṭiladdhassa paṭilābhāya cittaṃ paṇidahati, cetaso paṇidhānapaccayā tadabhinandati, tadabhinandanto anāgataṃ paṭikaṅkhati. Iti me sotaṃ siyā anāgatamaddhānaṃ iti saddāti…pe… iti me ghānaṃ siyā anāgatamaddhānaṃ iti gandhāti… iti me jivhā siyā anāgatamaddhānaṃ iti rasāti… iti me kāyo siyā anāgatamaddhānaṃ iti phoṭṭhabbāti… iti me mano siyā anāgatamaddhānaṃ iti dhammāti – appaṭiladdhassa paṭilābhāya cittaṃ paṇidahati, cetaso paṇidhānapaccayā tadabhinandati, tadabhinandanto anāgataṃ paṭikaṅkhati – evaṃ kho, āvuso, anāgataṃ paṭikaṅkhati.
「诸友,如何期待未来?『我在未来时将有眼』『将有色』——为了获得未得之物而倾心,由于心的倾向之缘而欢喜于彼,欢喜于彼者期待未来。『我在未来时将有耳』『将有声』……『我在未来时将有鼻』『将有香』……『我在未来时将有舌』『将有味』……『我在未来时将有身』『将有触』……『我在未来时将有意』『将有法』——为了获得未得之物而倾心,由于心的倾向之缘而欢喜于彼,欢喜于彼者期待未来——诸友,如此期待未来。」
‘‘Kathañca, āvuso, anāgataṃ nappaṭikaṅkhati? Iti me cakkhu siyā anāgatamaddhānaṃ iti rūpāti – appaṭiladdhassa paṭilābhāya cittaṃ nappaṇidahati , cetaso appaṇidhānapaccayā na tadabhinandati, na tadabhinandanto anāgataṃ nappaṭikaṅkhati. Iti me sotaṃ siyā anāgatamaddhānaṃ iti saddāti…pe… iti me ghānaṃ siyā anāgatamaddhānaṃ iti gandhāti… iti me jivhā siyā anāgatamaddhānaṃ iti rasāti… iti me kāyo siyā anāgatamaddhānaṃ iti phoṭṭhabbāti… iti me mano siyā anāgatamaddhānaṃ iti dhammāti – appaṭiladdhassa paṭilābhāya cittaṃ nappaṇidahati, cetaso appaṇidhānapaccayā na tadabhinandati, na tadabhinandanto anāgataṃ nappaṭikaṅkhati – evaṃ kho, āvuso, anāgataṃ nappaṭikaṅkhati.
「诸友,如何不期待未来?『我在未来时将有眼』『将有色』——为了获得未得之物而不倾心,由于心的不倾向之缘而不欢喜于彼,不欢喜于彼者不期待未来。『我在未来时将有耳』『将有声』……『我在未来时将有鼻』『将有香』……『我在未来时将有舌』『将有味』……『我在未来时将有身』『将有触』……『我在未来时将有意』『将有法』——为了获得未得之物而不倾心,由于心的不倾向之缘而不欢喜于彼,不欢喜于彼者不期待未来——诸友,如此不期待未来。」
§284
‘‘Kathañca, āvuso, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṃhīrati? Yañcāvuso, cakkhu ye ca rūpā – ubhayametaṃ paccuppannaṃ. Tasmiṃ ce paccuppanne chandarāgappaṭibaddhaṃ hoti viññāṇaṃ, chandarāgappaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa tadabhinandati, tadabhinandanto paccuppannesu dhammesu saṃhīrati. Yañcāvuso, sotaṃ ye ca saddā…pe… yañcāvuso, ghānaṃ ye ca gandhā… yā cāvuso, jivhā ye ca rasā… yo cāvuso, kāyo ye ca phoṭṭhabbā… yo cāvuso, mano ye ca dhammā – ubhayametaṃ paccuppannaṃ. Tasmiṃ ce paccuppanne chandarāgappaṭibaddhaṃ hoti viññāṇaṃ, chandarāgappaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa tadabhinandati, tadabhinandanto paccuppannesu dhammesu saṃhīrati – evaṃ kho, āvuso, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṃhīrati.
「诸友,如何于现在诸法被征服?诸友,凡眼与凡色——此二者都是现在。若于彼现在,识被欲贪所系缚,由于识被欲贪所系缚而欢喜于彼,欢喜于彼者于现在诸法被征服。诸友,凡耳与凡声……诸友,凡鼻与凡香……诸友,凡舌与凡味……诸友,凡身与凡触……诸友,凡意与凡法——此二者都是现在。若于彼现在,识被欲贪所系缚,由于识被欲贪所系缚而欢喜于彼,欢喜于彼者于现在诸法被征服——诸友,如此于现在诸法被征服。」
‘‘Kathañca , āvuso, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṃhīrati? Yañcāvuso, cakkhu ye ca rūpā – ubhayametaṃ paccuppannaṃ. Tasmiṃ ce paccuppanne na chandarāgappaṭibaddhaṃ hoti viññāṇaṃ, na chandarāgappaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa na tadabhinandati, na tadabhinandanto paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṃhīrati. Yañcāvuso, sotaṃ ye ca saddā…pe… yañcāvuso, ghānaṃ ye ca gandhā… yā cāvuso, jivhā ye ca rasā… yo cāvuso, kāyo ye ca phoṭṭhabbā… yo cāvuso, mano ye ca dhammā – ubhayametaṃ paccuppannaṃ. Tasmiṃ ce paccuppanne na chandarāgappaṭibaddhaṃ hoti viññāṇaṃ, na chandarāgappaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa na tadabhinandati, na tadabhinandanto paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṃhīrati – evaṃ kho, āvuso, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṃhīrati.
「诸友,如何于现在诸法不被征服?诸友,凡眼与凡色——此二者都是现在。若于彼现在,识不被欲贪所系缚,由于识不被欲贪所系缚而不欢喜于彼,不欢喜于彼者于现在诸法不被征服。诸友,凡耳与凡声……诸友,凡鼻与凡香……诸友,凡舌与凡味……诸友,凡身与凡触……诸友,凡意与凡法——此二者都是现在。若于彼现在,识不被欲贪所系缚,由于识不被欲贪所系缚而不欢喜于彼,不欢喜于彼者于现在诸法不被征服——诸友,如此于现在诸法不被征服。」
§285
‘‘Yaṃ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṃ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ paviṭṭho –
「诸友,世尊简要地诵出总说后,未详细地分别论其义,即从座起进入住处——」
‘‘Atītaṃ nānvāgameyya…pe…
「不应追忆过去……」
Taṃ ve bhaddekarattoti, santo ācikkhate munī’’ti.
「寂静的牟尼说彼为善一夜者。」
‘‘Imassa kho ahaṃ, āvuso, bhagavatā saṃkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa evaṃ vitthārena atthaṃ ājānāmi. Ākaṅkhamānā ca pana tumhe āyasmanto bhagavantaṃyeva upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṃ paṭipuccheyyātha, yathā vo bhagavā byākaroti tathā naṃ dhāreyyāthā’’ti.
「诸位贤友,对于世尊所总说的这个教诫,未详细解释其义理,我如此详细地了知其义理。然而,诸位具寿若希望的话,可以前往世尊处就此义理请问,应当如世尊所分别论的那样受持。」
Atha kho te bhikkhū āyasmato mahākaccānassa bhāsitaṃ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Ekamantaṃ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṃ etadavocuṃ – ‘‘yaṃ kho no, bhante, bhagavā saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṃ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ paviṭṭho –
于是,那些比库随喜、欢喜具寿马哈咖吒亚那的所说后,从座起立,前往世尊处。抵达后,礼敬世尊,在一旁坐下。在一旁坐下的那些比库对世尊如此说:「尊者,世尊总说教诫后,未详细解释其义理,就从座起立进入住所——
‘‘Atītaṃ nānvāgameyya…pe…
「不应追逐过去……(中略)……
Taṃ ve bhaddekarattoti, santo ācikkhate munī’’ti.
寂静者牟尼宣说:『此即一夜贤善者。』」
Tesaṃ no, bhante, amhākaṃ, acirapakkantassa bhagavato, etadahosi – ‘‘idaṃ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṃ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ paviṭṭho –
尊者,世尊离去不久,我们生起这样的想法:『诸位贤友,世尊总说教诫后,未详细解释其义理,就从座起立进入住所——
‘‘Atītaṃ nānvāgameyya, nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṃ;
「不应追逐过去,不应期待未来;
Yadatītaṃ pahīnaṃ taṃ, appattañca anāgataṃ.
过去的已舍断,未来的未到达。
‘‘Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṃ, tattha tattha vipassati;
「对于现在的法,于其处其处观照;」
Asaṃhīraṃ asaṃkuppaṃ, taṃ vidvā manubrūhaye.
不动摇、不震动,智者应了知后增长它。
‘‘Ajjeva kiccamātappaṃ, ko jaññā maraṇaṃ suve;
今日就应努力,谁知明日死亡?
Na hi no saṅgaraṃ tena, mahāsenena maccunā.
确实我们不能与那大军的死神讲和。
‘‘Evaṃ vihāriṃ ātāpiṃ, ahorattamatanditaṃ;
如此住、热诚、日夜不懈怠者,
Taṃ ve bhaddekarattoti, santo ācikkhate munī’’ti.
寂静的牟尼说他确实是『一夜贤者』。
‘‘‘Ko nu kho imassa bhagavatā saṃkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajeyyā’ti? Tesaṃ no, bhante, amhākaṃ etadahosi – ‘ayaṃ kho āyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṃvaṇṇito sambhāvito ca viññūnaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ. Pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṃkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajituṃ. Yaṃnūna mayaṃ yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkameyyāma; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṃ mahākaccānaṃ etamatthaṃ paṭipuccheyyāmā’ti. Atha kho mayaṃ, bhante, yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkamimha; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṃ mahākaccānaṃ etamatthaṃ paṭipucchimha. Tesaṃ no, bhante, āyasmatā mahākaccānena imehi ākārehi imehi padehi imehi byañjanehi attho vibhatto’’ti.
我们想:『谁能详细解释这世尊简略所说、未详细解释义理的详细义理呢?』尊者,我们这样想:『这位具寿马哈咖吒亚那既为导师所称赞,也为诸有智的梵行同伴所尊重。具寿马哈咖吒亚那能够详细解释这世尊简略所说、未详细解释义理的详细义理。让我们前往具寿马哈咖吒亚那处;前往后向具寿马哈咖吒亚那询问此义。』尊者,然后我们前往具寿马哈咖吒亚那处;前往后向具寿马哈咖吒亚那询问此义。尊者,具寿马哈咖吒亚那以这些方式、这些句子、这些文句为我们解释了义理。
‘‘Paṇḍito, bhikkhave, mahākaccāno; mahāpañño, bhikkhave mahākaccāno. Maṃ cepi tumhe, bhikkhave, etamatthaṃ paṭipuccheyyātha, ahampi taṃ evamevaṃ byākareyyaṃ yathā taṃ mahākaccānena byākataṃ. Eso, cevetassa attho. Evañca naṃ dhārethā’’ti.
诸比库,马哈咖吒亚那是贤者;诸比库,马哈咖吒亚那是大慧者。诸比库,如果你们向我询问此义,我也会如马哈咖吒亚那所解释的那样解释。这就是它的义理。你们应当如此受持它。
Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti.
世尊如此说。那些比库满意欢喜世尊所说。
Mahākaccānabhaddekarattasuttaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ tatiyaṃ. · 玛哈咖吒那一夜贤者经完 第三
4. Lomasakaṅgiyabhaddekarattasuttaṃ4. 罗摩塞咖亚一夜贤者经
§286
Evaṃ me sutaṃ – ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā lomasakaṅgiyo sakkesu viharati kapilavatthusmiṃ nigrodhārāme. Atha kho candano devaputto abhikkantāya rattiyā abhikkantavaṇṇo kevalakappaṃ nigrodhārāmaṃ obhāsetvā yenāyasmā lomasakaṅgiyo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṃ ṭhito kho candano devaputto āyasmantaṃ lomasakaṅgiyaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘dhāresi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañcā’’ti? ‘‘Na kho ahaṃ, āvuso, dhāremi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Tvaṃ panāvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañcā’’ti? ‘‘Ahampi kho, bhikkhu, na dhāremi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Dhāresi pana tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’’ti? ‘‘Na kho ahaṃ, āvuso, dhāremi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā. Tvaṃ panāvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’’ti? ‘‘Dhāremi kho ahaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’’ti. ‘‘Yathā kathaṃ pana tvaṃ, āvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’’ti? ‘‘Ekamidaṃ, bhikkhu, samayaṃ bhagavā devesu tāvatiṃsesu viharati pāricchattakamūle paṇḍukambalasilāyaṃ. Tatra bhagavā devānaṃ tāvatiṃsānaṃ bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca abhāsi –
如是我闻——一时,世尊住在沙瓦提,揭德林阿那他宾地咖的园林。尔时,具寿咖喇沙卡喇基亚住在释迦族中,咖毕拉瓦图的尼拘律园。时,旃檀那天子于夜已深,以殊胜的容色照亮整个尼拘律园后,前往具寿咖喇沙卡喇基亚处;抵达后,站立于一旁。站立于一旁的旃檀那天子对具寿咖喇沙卡喇基亚如是说:「比库,你持有善一夜的总说与详说吗?」「贤友,我不持有善一夜的总说与详说。贤友,那你持有善一夜的总说与详说吗?」「比库,我也不持有善一夜的总说与详说。但是,比库,你持有善一夜的偈颂吗?」「贤友,我不持有善一夜的偈颂。贤友,那你持有善一夜的偈颂吗?」「比库,我持有善一夜的偈颂。」「贤友,那你如何持有善一夜的偈颂呢?」「比库,一时,世尊住在三十三天,巴利恰答咖树根,班杜咖巴喇石座。在那里,世尊对三十三天的诸天宣说善一夜的总说与详说——
‘‘Atītaṃ nānvāgameyya, nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṃ;
「不应追逐过去,不应期待未来;
Yadatītaṃ pahīnaṃ taṃ, appattañca anāgataṃ.
过去的已舍弃,未来的未到达。
‘‘Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṃ, tattha tattha vipassati;
「对于现在的法,于彼彼处观察;
Asaṃhīraṃ asaṃkuppaṃ, taṃ vidvā manubrūhaye.
不动摇、不动乱,知此而修习。
‘‘Ajjeva kiccamātappaṃ, ko jaññā maraṇaṃ suve;
「今日即应勤作,谁知明日有死?
Na hi no saṅgaraṃ tena, mahāsenena maccunā.
确实不与彼死神,大军有和解。
‘‘Evaṃ vihāriṃ ātāpiṃ, ahorattamatanditaṃ;
「如是住者热诚,日夜不懈怠;
Taṃ ve bhaddekarattoti, santo ācikkhate munī’’ti.
寂静的牟尼宣说那确实是「善一夜者」。
‘‘Evaṃ kho ahaṃ, bhikkhu, dhāremi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā. Uggaṇhāhi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca; pariyāpuṇāhi tvaṃ , bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca; dhārehi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Atthasaṃhito, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddeso ca vibhaṅgo ca ādibrahmacariyako’’ti. Idamavoca candano devaputto. Idaṃ vatvā tatthevantaradhāyi.
「比库,我如此忆持善一夜者的偈颂。比库,你应学习善一夜者的摄颂与分别论;比库,你应通达善一夜者的摄颂与分别论;比库,你应忆持善一夜者的摄颂与分别论。比库,善一夜者的摄颂与分别论是与义相应的,是梵行之初。」旃檀那天子说了此语。说了此语后,就在那里消失了。
§287
Atha kho āyasmā lomasakaṅgiyo tassā rattiyā accayena senāsanaṃ saṃsāmetvā pattacīvaramādāya yena sāvatthi tena cārikaṃ pakkāmi. Anupubbena cārikaṃ caramāno yena sāvatthi jetavanaṃ anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāmo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Ekamantaṃ nisinno kho āyasmā lomasakaṅgiyo bhagavantaṃ etadavoca –
那时,具寿罗马沙康其亚在那夜过后,整理住处,取钵与衣,向沙瓦提游行。他次第游行,来到沙瓦提的揭德林阿那他宾地咖园,去到世尊那里;到了之后,礼敬世尊,坐在一边。坐在一边的具寿罗马沙康其亚对世尊如此说:
‘‘Ekamidāhaṃ, bhante, samayaṃ sakkesu viharāmi kapilavatthusmiṃ nigrodhārāme. Atha kho, bhante, aññataro devaputto abhikkantāya rattiyā abhikkantavaṇṇo kevalakappaṃ nigrodhārāmaṃ obhāsetvā yenāhaṃ tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṃ ṭhito kho, bhante, so devaputto maṃ etadavoca – ‘dhāresi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañcā’ti? Evaṃ vutte ahaṃ, bhante, taṃ devaputtaṃ etadavocaṃ – ‘na kho ahaṃ, āvuso, dhāremi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Tvaṃ panāvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañcā’ti? ‘Ahampi kho, bhikkhu, na dhāremi bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Dhāresi pana tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’ti? ‘Na kho ahaṃ, āvuso, dhāremi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā. Tvaṃ panāvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’ti? ‘Dhāremi kho ahaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’ti. ‘Yathā kathaṃ pana tvaṃ, āvuso, dhāresi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā’ti? Ekamidaṃ, bhikkhu, samayaṃ bhagavā devesu tāvatiṃsesu viharati pāricchattakamūle paṇḍukambalasilāyaṃ . Tatra kho bhagavā devānaṃ tāvatiṃsānaṃ bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca abhāsi –
「尊者,一时我住在萨咖国,在咖毕拉瓦图的尼拘律园。尊者,那时,某位天子在深夜时分,以殊胜的容色照亮整个尼拘律园后,来到我那里;到了之后,站在一边。尊者,站在一边的那位天子对我如此说:『比库,你忆持善一夜者的摄颂与分别论吗?』尊者,如此说时,我对那位天子如此说:『朋友,我不忆持善一夜者的摄颂与分别论。朋友,但你忆持善一夜者的摄颂与分别论吗?』『比库,我也不忆持善一夜者的摄颂与分别论。但是,比库,你忆持善一夜者的偈颂吗?』『朋友,我不忆持善一夜者的偈颂。朋友,但你忆持善一夜者的偈颂吗?』『比库,我忆持善一夜者的偈颂。』『朋友,那么你如何忆持善一夜者的偈颂呢?』『比库,一时世尊住在三十三天,在巴利恰答咖树下的班度咖巴喇石上。在那里,世尊为三十三天的天人们宣说善一夜者的摄颂与分别论:』
‘‘Atītaṃ nānvāgameyya…pe…
「『不应追逐过去……(中略)……
Taṃ ve bhaddekarattoti, santo ācikkhate munī’’ti.
寂静的牟尼宣说那确实是「善一夜者」。』
‘‘Evaṃ kho ahaṃ, bhikkhu, dhāremi bhaddekarattiyo gāthā. Uggaṇhāhi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca; pariyāpuṇāhi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca; dhārehi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca. Atthasaṃhito, bhikkhu, bhaddekarattassa uddeso ca vibhaṅgo ca ādibrahmacariyako’ti. Idamavoca, bhante, so devaputto; idaṃ vatvā tatthevantaradhāyi. Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā bhaddekarattassa uddesañca vibhaṅgañca desetū’’ti.
「『比库,我如此忆持善一夜者的偈颂。比库,你应学习善一夜者的摄颂与分别论;比库,你应通达善一夜者的摄颂与分别论;比库,你应忆持善一夜者的摄颂与分别论。比库,善一夜者的摄颂与分别论是与义相应的,是梵行之初。』尊者,那位天子说了此语;说了此语后,就在那里消失了。尊者,请世尊为我宣说善一夜者的摄颂与分别论,那就好了!」
§288
‘‘Jānāsi pana tvaṃ, bhikkhu, taṃ devaputta’’nti? ‘‘Na kho ahaṃ, bhante, jānāmi taṃ devaputta’’nti. ‘‘Candano nāma so, bhikkhu, devaputto. Candano, bhikkhu, devaputto aṭṭhiṃ katvā manasikatvā sabbacetasā samannāharitvā ohitasoto dhammaṃ suṇāti. Tena hi, bhikkhu, suṇāhi, sādhukaṃ manasi karohi; bhāsissāmī’’ti. ‘‘Evaṃ, bhante’’ti kho āyasmā lomasakaṅgiyo bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca –
「但是,比库,你认识那位天子吗?」「尊者,我不认识那位天子。」「比库,那位天子名叫旃檀那。比库,旃檀那天子作意、思惟、以全心专注、倾耳而听法。那么,比库,你要听!你要善加作意!我要说了。」「是的,尊者。」具寿罗马沙康其亚回答世尊。世尊如此说:
‘‘Atītaṃ nānvāgameyya, nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṃ;
「不应追忆过去,不应期盼未来;
Yadatītaṃ pahīnaṃ taṃ, appattañca anāgataṃ.
过去的已舍断,未来的未到达。
‘‘Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṃ, tattha tattha vipassati;
「对于现在的法,于彼彼处观照;
Asaṃhīraṃ asaṃkuppaṃ, taṃ vidvā manubrūhaye.
不动摇、不震动,智者应增长彼。
‘‘Ajjeva kiccamātappaṃ, ko jaññā maraṇaṃ suve;
「今日即应努力,谁知明日有死?
Na hi no saṅgaraṃ tena, mahāsenena maccunā;
确实我们不与彼,大军的死魔交战;
‘‘Evaṃ vihāriṃ ātāpiṃ, ahorattamatanditaṃ;
「如此住、热诚者,日夜不懈怠,
Taṃ ve bhaddekarattoti, santo ācikkhate muni’’.
寂静的牟尼说:彼确实是『善一夜者』。」
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhu, atītaṃ anvāgameti…pe… evaṃ kho, bhikkhu, atītaṃ anvāgameti. Kathañca , bhikkhu, atītaṃ nānvāgameti…pe… evaṃ kho, bhikkhu, atītaṃ nānvāgameti. Kathañca, bhikkhu, anāgataṃ paṭikaṅkhati…pe… evaṃ kho, bhikkhu, anāgataṃ paṭikaṅkhati. Kathañca, bhikkhu, anāgataṃ nappaṭikaṅkhati…pe… evaṃ kho, bhikkhu, anāgataṃ nappaṭikaṅkhati. Kathañca, bhikkhu, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṃhīrati…pe… evaṃ kho, bhikkhu, paccuppannesu dhammesu saṃhīrati. Kathañca, bhikkhu, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṃhīrati…pe… evaṃ kho, bhikkhu, paccuppannesu dhammesu na saṃhīrati.
「比库,如何追逐过去?……如是,比库,追逐过去。比库,如何不追逐过去?……如是,比库,不追逐过去。比库,如何期待未来?……如是,比库,期待未来。比库,如何不期待未来?……如是,比库,不期待未来。比库,如何于现在诸法被征服?……如是,比库,于现在诸法被征服。比库,如何于现在诸法不被征服?……如是,比库,于现在诸法不被征服。」
‘‘Atītaṃ nānvāgameyya, nappaṭikaṅkhe anāgataṃ;
「不应追逐过去,不应期待未来;
Yadatītaṃ pahīnaṃ taṃ, appattañca anāgataṃ.
「过去的已被舍断,未来的尚未到达。
‘‘Paccuppannañca yo dhammaṃ, tattha tattha vipassati;
「于现在的法,在那里在那里观照;
Asaṃhīraṃ asaṃkuppaṃ, taṃ vidvā manubrūhaye.
「不被征服、不被动摇,了知它而增长。
‘‘Ajjeva kiccamātappaṃ, ko jaññā maraṇaṃ suve;
「今日即应精勤努力,谁知明日死亡来临?
Na hi no saṅgaraṃ tena, mahāsenena maccunā.
「确实我们与死神那大军,没有协议。
‘‘Evaṃ vihāriṃ ātāpiṃ, ahorattamatanditaṃ;
「如此住、热诚、日夜不懈怠者;」
Taṃ ve bhaddekarattoti, santo ācikkhate munī’’ti.
寂静的牟尼宣说:「那确实是善一夜者。」
Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā lomasakaṅgiyo bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandīti.
世尊说了这些。具寿罗马沙康其亚心满意足,欢喜世尊所说。
Lomasakaṅgiyabhaddekarattasuttaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ catutthaṃ. · 罗摩塞咖亚一夜贤者经完 第四
5. Cūḷakammavibhaṅgasuttaṃ5. 小业分别经
§289
Evaṃ me sutaṃ – ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane, anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Atha kho subho māṇavo todeyyaputto yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṃ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ vītisāretvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Ekamantaṃ nisinno kho subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhagavantaṃ etadavoca –
如是我闻——一时,世尊住在沙瓦提,揭德林,阿那他宾地咖的园林。那时,学童须跋·多德亚之子前往世尊处;抵达后,与世尊互相问候。交换了友好、值得忆念的交谈后,在一旁坐下。在一旁坐下的学童须跋·多德亚之子对世尊这样说——
‘‘Ko nu kho, bho gotama, hetu ko paccayo yena manussānaṃyeva sataṃ manussabhūtānaṃ dissanti hīnappaṇītatā? Dissanti hi, bho gotama, manussā appāyukā, dissanti dīghāyukā; dissanti bavhābādhā , dissanti appābādhā; dissanti dubbaṇṇā, dissanti vaṇṇavanto; dissanti appesakkhā, dissanti mahesakkhā; dissanti appabhogā, dissanti mahābhogā; dissanti nīcakulīnā, dissanti uccākulīnā; dissanti duppaññā, dissanti paññavanto . Ko nu kho, bho gotama, hetu ko paccayo yena manussānaṃyeva sataṃ manussabhūtānaṃ dissanti hīnappaṇītatā’’ti?
「果德玛先生,什么因、什么缘,由此在人类当中,正是人类的存在者,可见到卑劣与高尚?果德玛先生,可见到短命的人,可见到长寿的人;可见到多病的,可见到少病的;可见到丑陋的,可见到美貌的;可见到少威势的,可见到大威势的;可见到少财富的,可见到大财富的;可见到低贱家族的,可见到高贵家族的;可见到劣慧的,可见到有慧的。果德玛先生,什么因、什么缘,由此在人类当中,正是人类的存在者,可见到卑劣与高尚?」
‘‘Kammassakā , māṇava, sattā kammadāyādā kammayonī kammabandhū kammappaṭisaraṇā. Kammaṃ satte vibhajati yadidaṃ – hīnappaṇītatāyāti. Na kho ahaṃ imassa bhoto gotamassa saṃkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṃ ājānāmi. Sādhu me bhavaṃ gotamo tathā dhammaṃ desetu yathā ahaṃ imassa bhoto gotamassa saṃkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṃ ājāneyya’’nti.
「学童,众生是业的所有者,业的继承者,以业为起源,以业为亲属,以业为皈依处。业使众分别论,即:卑劣与高尚。我不了解果德玛先生这简略所说、未详细解释义理的详细义理。善哉,愿果德玛先生为我说法,使我能了解果德玛先生这简略所说、未详细解释义理的详细义理。」
§290
‘‘Tena hi, māṇava, suṇāhi, sādhukaṃ manasi karohi; bhāsissāmī’’ti. ‘‘Evaṃ, bho’’ti kho subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca –
「那么,学童,你听!你要善加作意;我将说。」「是的,先生。」学童须跋·多德亚之子回答世尊。世尊这样说——
‘‘Idha, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā pāṇātipātī hoti luddo lohitapāṇi hatapahate niviṭṭho adayāpanno pāṇabhūtesu . So tena kammena evaṃ samattena evaṃ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati, sace manussattaṃ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati appāyuko hoti. Appāyukasaṃvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṃ – pāṇātipātī hoti luddo lohitapāṇi hatapahate niviṭṭho adayāpanno pāṇabhūtesu.
「学童,这里,某位女人或男人是杀生者,凶残、手染血腥,专事杀戮与伤害,对诸有生命者无慈悲心。他以此业如此完成、如此执取,身坏命终后,投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱。若他身坏命终后不投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱,若他来到人界,无论生在何处都是短命的。学童,这是导向短命的道路,即:是杀生者,凶残、手染血腥,专事杀戮与伤害,对诸有生命者无慈悲心。
‘‘Idha pana, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho, lajjī dayāpanno sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati. So tena kammena evaṃ samattena evaṃ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati, sace manussattaṃ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati dīghāyuko hoti. Dīghāyukasaṃvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṃ – pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho, lajjī dayāpanno sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharati.
「学童,然而这里,某位女人或男人舍断杀生,离杀生,已放下棍棒、已放下刀剑,有惭、有悲悯心,住于对一切有生命者的利益与悲悯。他以此业如此完成、如此执取,身坏命终后,投生到善趣、天界。若他身坏命终后不投生到善趣、天界,若他来到人界,无论生在何处都是长寿的。学童,这是导向长寿的道路,即:舍断杀生,离杀生,已放下棍棒、已放下刀剑,有惭、有悲悯心,住于对一切有生命者的利益与悲悯。」
§291
‘‘Idha , māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā sattānaṃ viheṭhakajātiko hoti, pāṇinā vā leḍḍunā vā daṇḍena vā satthena vā. So tena kammena evaṃ samattena evaṃ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati, sace manussattaṃ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati bavhābādho hoti. Bavhābādhasaṃvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṃ – sattānaṃ viheṭhakajātiko hoti pāṇinā vā leḍḍunā vā daṇḍena vā satthena vā.
「学童,于此,某位女人或男人生性恼害众生,以手、以土块、以棍、以刀。他以此业如此完成、如此承担,身坏命终后,投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱。若他身坏命终后不投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱,如果来到人界,无论生于何处,都多病。学童,这是导向多病的道,即:生性恼害众生,以手、以土块、以棍、以刀。」
‘‘Idha pana, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā sattānaṃ aviheṭhakajātiko hoti pāṇinā vā leḍḍunā vā daṇḍena vā satthena vā. So tena kammena evaṃ samattena evaṃ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati, sace manussattaṃ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati appābādho hoti. Appābādhasaṃvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṃ – sattānaṃ aviheṭhakajātiko hoti pāṇinā vā leḍḍunā vā daṇḍena vā satthena vā.
「学童,然而于此,某位女人或男人生性不恼害众生,不以手、不以土块、不以棍、不以刀。他以此业如此完成、如此承担,身坏命终后,投生到善趣、天界。若他身坏命终后不投生到善趣、天界,如果来到人界,无论生于何处,都少病。学童,这是导向少病的道,即:生性不恼害众生,不以手、不以土块、不以棍、不以刀。」
§292
‘‘Idha, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā kodhano hoti upāyāsabahulo. Appampi vutto samāno abhisajjati kuppati byāpajjati patiṭṭhīyati kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātukaroti. So tena kammena evaṃ samattena evaṃ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati, sace manussattaṃ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati dubbaṇṇo hoti. Dubbaṇṇasaṃvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṃ – kodhano hoti upāyāsabahulo; appampi vutto samāno abhisajjati kuppati byāpajjati patiṭṭhīyati kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātukaroti.
「学童,于此,某位女人或男人易怒,多恼害。即使被说少许,也生气、愤怒、嗔恨、固执,显示愤怒、嗔恨和不满。他以此业如此完成、如此承担,身坏命终后,投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱。若他身坏命终后不投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱,如果来到人界,无论生于何处,都丑陋。学童,这是导向丑陋的道,即:易怒,多恼害;即使被说少许,也生气、愤怒、嗔恨、固执,显示愤怒、嗔恨和不满。」
‘‘Idha pana, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā akkodhano hoti anupāyāsabahulo; bahumpi vutto samāno nābhisajjati na kuppati na byāpajjati na patiṭṭhīyati na kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātukaroti. So tena kammena evaṃ samattena evaṃ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati, sace manussattaṃ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati pāsādiko hoti. Pāsādikasaṃvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṃ – akkodhano hoti anupāyāsabahulo; bahumpi vutto samāno nābhisajjati na kuppati na byāpajjati na patiṭṭhīyati na kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātukaroti.
「学童,然而于此,某位女人或男人不易怒,不多恼害;即使被说很多,也不生气、不愤怒、不嗔恨、不固执,不显示愤怒、嗔恨和不满。他以此业如此完成、如此承担,身坏命终后,投生到善趣、天界。若他身坏命终后不投生到善趣、天界,如果来到人界,无论生于何处,都端正。学童,这是导向端正的道,即:不易怒,不多恼害;即使被说很多,也不生气、不愤怒、不嗔恨、不固执,不显示愤怒、嗔恨和不满。」
§293
‘‘Idha, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā issāmanako hoti; paralābhasakkāragarukāramānanavandanapūjanāsu issati upadussati issaṃ bandhati. So tena kammena evaṃ samattena evaṃ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati, sace manussattaṃ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati appesakkho hoti. Appesakkhasaṃvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṃ – issāmanako hoti; paralābhasakkāragarukāramānanavandanapūjanāsu issati upadussati issaṃ bandhati.
「学童,于此,某位女人或男人有嫉妒心;对他人的利养、恭敬、尊重、礼敬、礼拜、供养嫉妒、恼害、怀嫉妒。他以此业如此完成、如此承担,身坏命终后,投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱。若他身坏命终后不投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱,如果来到人界,无论生于何处,都少权势。学童,这是导向少权势的道,即:有嫉妒心;对他人的利养、恭敬、尊重、礼敬、礼拜、供养嫉妒、恼害、怀嫉妒。」
‘‘Idha pana, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā anissāmanako hoti; paralābhasakkāragarukāramānanavandanapūjanāsu na issati na upadussati na issaṃ bandhati. So tena kammena evaṃ samattena evaṃ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati, sace manussattaṃ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati mahesakkho hoti. Mahesakkhasaṃvattanikā esā, māṇava , paṭipadā yadidaṃ – anissāmanako hoti; paralābhasakkāragarukāramānanavandanapūjanāsu na issati na upadussati na issaṃ bandhati.
「学童,然而于此,某位女人或男人无嫉妒心;对他人的利养、恭敬、尊重、礼敬、礼拜、供养不嫉妒、不恼害、不怀嫉妒。他以此业如此完成、如此承担,身坏命终后,投生到善趣、天界。若他身坏命终后不投生到善趣、天界,如果来到人界,无论生于何处,都大权势。学童,这是导向大权势的道,即:无嫉妒心;对他人的利养、恭敬、尊重、礼敬、礼拜、供养不嫉妒、不恼害、不怀嫉妒。」
§294
‘‘Idha, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā na dātā hoti samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā annaṃ pānaṃ vatthaṃ yānaṃ mālāgandhavilepanaṃ seyyāvasathapadīpeyyaṃ. So tena kammena evaṃ samattena evaṃ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati, sace manussattaṃ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati appabhogo hoti. Appabhogasaṃvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṃ – na dātā hoti samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā annaṃ pānaṃ vatthaṃ yānaṃ mālāgandhavilepanaṃ seyyāvasathapadīpeyyaṃ.
「学童,于此,某位女人或男人不施与沙门或婆罗门食物、饮料、衣服、车乘、花鬘香涂料、卧具住所灯烛。他以此业如此完成、如此承担,身坏命终后,投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱。若他身坏命终后不投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱,如果来到人界,无论生于何处,都少财富。学童,这是导向少财富的道,即:不施与沙门或婆罗门食物、饮料、衣服、车乘、花鬘香涂料、卧具住所灯烛。」
‘‘Idha pana, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā dātā hoti samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā annaṃ pānaṃ vatthaṃ yānaṃ mālāgandhavilepanaṃ seyyāvasathapadīpeyyaṃ. So tena kammena evaṃ samattena evaṃ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati, sace manussattaṃ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati mahābhogo hoti. Mahābhogasaṃvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṃ – dātā hoti samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā annaṃ pānaṃ vatthaṃ yānaṃ mālāgandhavilepanaṃ seyyāvasathapadīpeyyaṃ.
「学童,然而于此,某位女人或男人施与沙门或婆罗门食物、饮料、衣服、车乘、花鬘香涂料、卧具住所灯烛。他以此业如此完成、如此承担,身坏命终后,投生到善趣、天界。若他身坏命终后不投生到善趣、天界,如果来到人界,无论生于何处,都大财富。学童,这是导向大财富的道,即:施与沙门或婆罗门食物、饮料、衣服、车乘、花鬘香涂料、卧具住所灯烛。」
§295
‘‘Idha, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā thaddho hoti atimānī – abhivādetabbaṃ na abhivādeti, paccuṭṭhātabbaṃ na paccuṭṭheti, āsanārahassa na āsanaṃ deti, maggārahassa na maggaṃ deti, sakkātabbaṃ na sakkaroti, garukātabbaṃ na garukaroti, mānetabbaṃ na māneti, pūjetabbaṃ na pūjeti. So tena kammena evaṃ samattena evaṃ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati, sace manussattaṃ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati nīcakulīno hoti. Nīcakulīnasaṃvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṃ – thaddho hoti atimānī; abhivādetabbaṃ na abhivādeti, paccuṭṭhātabbaṃ na paccuṭṭheti, āsanārahassa na āsanaṃ deti, maggārahassa na maggaṃ deti, sakkātabbaṃ na sakkaroti, garukātabbaṃ na garukaroti, mānetabbaṃ na māneti, pūjetabbaṃ na pūjeti.
「学童,于此,某位女人或男人傲慢、极慢——应礼敬者不礼敬,应起立者不起立,应给座者不给座,应让路者不让路,应恭敬者不恭敬,应尊重者不尊重,应尊敬者不尊敬,应供养者不供养。他以此业如此完成、如此承受,身坏命终后投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱。若身坏命终后不投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱,若来到人界,无论生于何处都出身卑贱。学童,这是导向卑贱出身的道,即:傲慢、极慢;应礼敬者不礼敬,应起立者不起立,应给座者不给座,应让路者不让路,应恭敬者不恭敬,应尊重者不尊重,应尊敬者不尊敬,应供养者不供养。」
‘‘Idha pana, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā atthaddho hoti anatimānī; abhivādetabbaṃ abhivādeti, paccuṭṭhātabbaṃ paccuṭṭheti, āsanārahassa āsanaṃ deti, maggārahassa maggaṃ deti, sakkātabbaṃ sakkaroti, garukātabbaṃ garukaroti, mānetabbaṃ māneti, pūjetabbaṃ pūjeti. So tena kammena evaṃ samattena evaṃ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati, sace manussattaṃ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati uccākulīno hoti. Uccākulīnasaṃvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṃ – atthaddho hoti anatimānī; abhivādetabbaṃ abhivādeti, paccuṭṭhātabbaṃ paccuṭṭheti, āsanārahassa āsanaṃ deti, maggārahassa maggaṃ deti, sakkātabbaṃ sakkaroti, garukātabbaṃ garukaroti, mānetabbaṃ māneti, pūjetabbaṃ pūjeti.
「学童,然而于此,某位女人或男人不傲慢、不极慢;应礼敬者礼敬,应起立者起立,应给座者给座,应让路者让路,应恭敬者恭敬,应尊重者尊重,应尊敬者尊敬,应供养者供养。他以此业如此完成、如此承受,身坏命终后投生到善趣、天界。若身坏命终后不投生到善趣、天界,若来到人界,无论生于何处都出身高贵。学童,这是导向高贵出身的道,即:不傲慢、不极慢;应礼敬者礼敬,应起立者起立,应给座者给座,应让路者让路,应恭敬者恭敬,应尊重者尊重,应尊敬者尊敬,应供养者供养。」
§296
‘‘Idha, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā upasaṅkamitvā na paripucchitā hoti – ‘kiṃ, bhante, kusalaṃ, kiṃ akusalaṃ; kiṃ sāvajjaṃ, kiṃ anavajjaṃ; kiṃ sevitabbaṃ, kiṃ na sevitabbaṃ; kiṃ me karīyamānaṃ dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya hoti, kiṃ vā pana me karīyamānaṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya hotī’ti? So tena kammena evaṃ samattena evaṃ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati, sace manussattaṃ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati duppañño hoti. Duppaññasaṃvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṃ – samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā upasaṅkamitvā na paripucchitā hoti – ‘kiṃ, bhante, kusalaṃ, kiṃ akusalaṃ; kiṃ sāvajjaṃ, kiṃ anavajjaṃ; kiṃ sevitabbaṃ, kiṃ na sevitabbaṃ ; kiṃ me karīyamānaṃ dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya hoti, kiṃ vā pana me karīyamānaṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya hotī’’’ti?
「学童,于此,某位女人或男人前往沙门或婆罗门处后不询问:『尊者,什么是善?什么是不善?什么是有罪?什么是无罪?什么应亲近?什么不应亲近?我做什么长夜导致无益与苦?或者我做什么长夜导致利益与乐?』他以此业如此完成、如此承受,身坏命终后投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱。若身坏命终后不投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱,若来到人界,无论生于何处都劣慧。学童,这是导向劣慧的道,即:前往沙门或婆罗门处后不询问:『尊者,什么是善?什么是不善?什么是有罪?什么是无罪?什么应亲近?什么不应亲近?我做什么长夜导致无益与苦?或者我做什么长夜导致利益与乐?』」
‘‘Idha pana, māṇava, ekacco itthī vā puriso vā samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā upasaṅkamitvā paripucchitā hoti – ‘kiṃ, bhante, kusalaṃ, kiṃ akusalaṃ; kiṃ sāvajjaṃ, kiṃ anavajjaṃ; kiṃ sevitabbaṃ, kiṃ na sevitabbaṃ; kiṃ me karīyamānaṃ dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya hoti, kiṃ vā pana me karīyamānaṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya hotī’ti? So tena kammena evaṃ samattena evaṃ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati, sace manussattaṃ āgacchati yattha yattha paccājāyati mahāpañño hoti. Mahāpaññasaṃvattanikā esā, māṇava, paṭipadā yadidaṃ – samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā upasaṅkamitvā paripucchitā hoti – ‘kiṃ, bhante, kusalaṃ, kiṃ akusalaṃ; kiṃ sāvajjaṃ, kiṃ anavajjaṃ; kiṃ sevitabbaṃ , kiṃ na sevitabbaṃ; kiṃ me karīyamānaṃ dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya hoti, kiṃ vā pana me karīyamānaṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya hotī’’’ti?
「学童,然而于此,某位女人或男人前往沙门或婆罗门处后询问:『尊者,什么是善?什么是不善?什么是有罪?什么是无罪?什么应亲近?什么不应亲近?我做什么长夜导致无益与苦?或者我做什么长夜导致利益与乐?』他以此业如此完成、如此承受,身坏命终后投生到善趣、天界。若身坏命终后不投生到善趣、天界,若来到人界,无论生于何处都大慧。学童,这是导向大慧的道,即:前往沙门或婆罗门处后询问:『尊者,什么是善?什么是不善?什么是有罪?什么是无罪?什么应亲近?什么不应亲近?我做什么长夜导致无益与苦?或者我做什么长夜导致利益与乐?』」
§297
‘‘Iti kho, māṇava, appāyukasaṃvattanikā paṭipadā appāyukattaṃ upaneti, dīghāyukasaṃvattanikā paṭipadā dīghāyukattaṃ upaneti; bavhābādhasaṃvattanikā paṭipadā bavhābādhattaṃ upaneti, appābādhasaṃvattanikā paṭipadā appābādhattaṃ upaneti; dubbaṇṇasaṃvattanikā paṭipadā dubbaṇṇattaṃ upaneti, pāsādikasaṃvattanikā paṭipadā pāsādikattaṃ upaneti; appesakkhasaṃvattanikā paṭipadā appesakkhattaṃ upaneti, mahesakkhasaṃvattanikā paṭipadā mahesakkhattaṃ upaneti; appabhogasaṃvattanikā paṭipadā appabhogattaṃ upaneti, mahābhogasaṃvattanikā paṭipadā mahābhogattaṃ upaneti; nīcakulīnasaṃvattanikā paṭipadā nīcakulīnattaṃ upaneti, uccākulīnasaṃvattanikā paṭipadā uccākulīnattaṃ upaneti; duppaññasaṃvattanikā paṭipadā duppaññattaṃ upaneti, mahāpaññasaṃvattanikā paṭipadā mahāpaññattaṃ upaneti. Kammassakā, māṇava, sattā kammadāyādā kammayonī kammabandhū kammappaṭisaraṇā. Kammaṃ satte vibhajati yadidaṃ – hīnappaṇītatāyā’’ti.
「学童,如此,导向短寿的道导致短寿,导向长寿的道导致长寿;导向多病的道导致多病,导向少病的道导致少病;导向丑陋的道导致丑陋,导向美貌的道导致美貌;导向少势力的道导致少势力,导向大势力的道导致大势力;导向少财的道导致少财,导向大财的道导致大财;导向卑贱出身的道导致卑贱出身,导向高贵出身的道导致高贵出身;导向劣慧的道导致劣慧,导向大慧的道导致大慧。学童,众生是业的所有者,业的继承者,以业为起源,以业为亲属,以业为皈依处。业分别论众生,即:卑劣与高尚。」
Evaṃ vutte, subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhagavantaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘abhikkantaṃ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṃ, bho gotama! Seyyathāpi, bho gotama, nikkujjitaṃ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṃ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṃ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṃ dhāreyya – ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṃ bhotā gotamena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito. Esāhaṃ bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañca. Upāsakaṃ maṃ bhavaṃ gotamo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṃ saraṇaṃ gata’’nti.
如是说已,学童兜德亚之子须跋对世尊如此说:「果德玛尊者,太殊胜了!果德玛尊者,太殊胜了!果德玛尊者,犹如扶起倒者,揭开覆盖物,为迷路者指示道路,或在黑暗中持来油灯——『有眼者将看见诸色』;同样地,果德玛尊者以种种方式阐明了法。我皈依果德玛尊者、法与比库僧团。愿果德玛尊者忆持我为近事男,从今日起终生皈依。」
Cūḷakammavibhaṅgasuttaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ pañcamaṃ. · 小业分别经完 第五
6. Mahākammavibhaṅgasuttaṃ6. 大业分别经
§298
Evaṃ me sutaṃ – ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā rājagahe viharati veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe. Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā samiddhi araññakuṭikāyaṃ viharati. Atha kho potaliputto paribbājako jaṅghāvihāraṃ anucaṅkamamāno anuvicaramāno yenāyasmā samiddhi tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā samiddhinā saddhiṃ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ vītisāretvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Ekamantaṃ nisinno kho potaliputto paribbājako āyasmantaṃ samiddhiṃ etadavoca – ‘‘sammukhā metaṃ, āvuso samiddhi, samaṇassa gotamassa sutaṃ, sammukhā paṭiggahitaṃ – ‘moghaṃ kāyakammaṃ moghaṃ vacīkammaṃ, manokammameva sacca’nti. Atthi ca sā samāpatti yaṃ samāpattiṃ samāpanno na kiñci vediyatī’’ti? ‘‘Mā hevaṃ, āvuso potaliputta, avaca; (mā hevaṃ, āvuso potaliputta, avaca;) mā bhagavantaṃ abbhācikkhi. Na hi sādhu bhagavato abbhakkhānaṃ. Na hi bhagavā evaṃ vadeyya – ‘moghaṃ kāyakammaṃ moghaṃ vacīkammaṃ, manokammameva sacca’nti. Atthi ca kho sā, āvuso, samāpatti yaṃ samāpattiṃ samāpanno na kiñci vediyatī’’ti. ‘‘Kīvaciraṃ pabbajitosi, āvuso samiddhī’’ti? ‘‘Na ciraṃ, āvuso! Tīṇi vassānī’’ti. ‘‘Ettha dāni mayaṃ there bhikkhū kiṃ vakkhāma, yatra hi nāma evaṃnavo bhikkhu satthāraṃ parirakkhitabbaṃ maññissati. Sañcetanikaṃ, āvuso samiddhi, kammaṃ katvā kāyena vācāya manasā kiṃ so vediyatī’’ti? ‘‘Sañcetanikaṃ, āvuso potaliputta, kammaṃ katvā kāyena vācāya manasā dukkhaṃ so vediyatī’’ti. Atha kho potaliputto paribbājako āyasmato samiddhissa bhāsitaṃ neva abhinandi nappaṭikkosi; anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.
如是我闻——一时,世尊住在王舍城竹林栗鼠庇护所。尔时,具寿沙玛内拉地住在林间小屋。时,游方者颇他离子在经行游步时,前往具寿沙玛内拉地处;抵达后与具寿沙玛内拉地互相问候。交换了友好、值得忆念的交谈后,在一旁坐下。在一旁坐下的游方者颇他离子对具寿沙玛内拉地如此说:「沙玛内拉地贤友,我从沙门果德玛面前听闻、面前领受:『身业是虚妄,语业是虚妄,唯意业是真实』。又有那种定,进入那种定者不感受任何事物。」「颇他离子贤友,不要这样说;(颇他离子贤友,不要这样说;)不要诽谤世尊。诽谤世尊确实不善。世尊确实不会这样说:『身业是虚妄,语业是虚妄,唯意业是真实』。贤友,然而确实有那种定,进入那种定者不感受任何事物。」「沙玛内拉地贤友,你出家多久了?」「不久,贤友!三年。」「现在我们对长老比库们该说什么呢?当这样的新比库认为应当保护导师时。沙玛内拉地贤友,以身、以语、以意造有意业后,他感受什么?」「颇他离子贤友,以身、以语、以意造有意业后,他感受苦。」于是游方者颇他离子对具寿沙玛内拉地所说既不欢喜也不反对;不欢喜、不反对后,从座起立离去。
§299
Atha kho āyasmā samiddhi acirapakkante potaliputte paribbājake yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā ānandena saddhiṃ sammodi. Sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ vītisāretvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Ekamantaṃ nisinno kho āyasmā samiddhi yāvatako ahosi potaliputtena paribbājakena saddhiṃ kathāsallāpo taṃ sabbaṃ āyasmato ānandassa ārocesi.
于是具寿沙玛内拉地在游方者颇他离子离去不久后,前往具寿阿难处;抵达后与具寿阿难互相问候。交换了友好、值得忆念的交谈后,在一旁坐下。在一旁坐下的具寿沙玛内拉地将与游方者颇他离子的全部对话告知具寿阿难。
Evaṃ vutte, āyasmā ānando āyasmantaṃ samiddhiṃ etadavoca – ‘‘atthi kho idaṃ, āvuso samiddhi, kathāpābhataṃ bhagavantaṃ dassanāya. Āyāmāvuso samiddhi, yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamissāma; upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṃ bhagavato ārocessāma. Yathā no bhagavā byākarissati tathā naṃ dhāressāmā’’ti. ‘‘Evamāvuso’’ti kho āyasmā samiddhi āyasmato ānandassa paccassosi.
如是说已,具寿阿难对具寿沙密地说:「贤友沙密地,这确实有话题可带去见世尊。来吧,贤友沙密地,我们去见世尊;去到之后,将此事禀告世尊。世尊如何分别论,我们就如此受持。」具寿沙密地回答具寿阿难:「是的,贤友。」
Atha kho āyasmā ca ānando āyasmā ca samiddhi yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Ekamantaṃ nisinno kho āyasmā ānando yāvatako ahosi āyasmato samiddhissa potaliputtena paribbājakena saddhiṃ kathāsallāpo taṃ sabbaṃ bhagavato ārocesi. Evaṃ vutte, bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘dassanampi kho ahaṃ, ānanda, potaliputtassa paribbājakassa nābhijānāmi, kuto panevarūpaṃ kathāsallāpaṃ? Iminā ca, ānanda, samiddhinā moghapurisena potaliputtassa paribbājakassa vibhajjabyākaraṇīyo pañho ekaṃsena byākato’’ti. Evaṃ vutte, āyasmā udāyī bhagavantaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘sace pana , bhante, āyasmatā samiddhinā idaṃ sandhāya bhāsitaṃ – yaṃ kiñci vedayitaṃ taṃ dukkhasmi’’nti.
于是,具寿阿难与具寿沙密地去见世尊;去到之后,礼敬世尊,坐在一边。坐在一边的具寿阿难将具寿沙密地与游方者波塔利子的全部对话禀告世尊。如是说已,世尊对具寿阿难说:「阿难,我不记得曾见过游方者波塔利子,何况有这样的对话呢?阿难,这个愚人沙密地,游方者波塔利子的问题应该分别论解答,他却一向地解答了。」如是说已,具寿伍达夷对世尊说:「然而,大德,如果具寿沙密地是指这个而说的:『凡所感受的,那都是苦』呢?」
§300
Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ āmantesi – ‘‘passasi no tvaṃ, ānanda, imassa udāyissa moghapurisassa ummaṅgaṃ ? Aññāsiṃ kho ahaṃ, ānanda – ‘idānevāyaṃ udāyī moghapuriso ummujjamāno ayoniso ummujjissatī’ti. Ādiṃyeva , ānanda, potaliputtena paribbājakena tisso vedanā pucchitā. Sacāyaṃ, ānanda, samiddhi moghapuriso potaliputtassa paribbājakassa evaṃ puṭṭho evaṃ byākareyya – ‘sañcetanikaṃ, āvuso potaliputta, kammaṃ katvā kāyena vācāya manasā sukhavedanīyaṃ sukhaṃ so vedayati; sañcetanikaṃ, āvuso potaliputta, kammaṃ katvā kāyena vācāya manasā dukkhavedanīyaṃ dukkhaṃ so vedayati; sañcetanikaṃ, āvuso potaliputta, kammaṃ katvā kāyena vācāya manasā adukkhamasukhavedanīyaṃ adukkhamasukhaṃ so vedayatī’ti. Evaṃ byākaramāno kho, ānanda, samiddhi moghapuriso potaliputtassa paribbājakassa sammā (byākaramāno) byākareyya. Api ca, ānanda, ke ca aññatitthiyā paribbājakā bālā abyattā ke ca tathāgatassa mahākammavibhaṅgaṃ jānissanti? Sace tumhe, ānanda, suṇeyyātha tathāgatassa mahākammavibhaṅgaṃ vibhajantassā’’ti.
于是,世尊对具寿阿难说:「阿难,你看到这个愚人伍达夷的愚痴吗?阿难,我已知道:『现在这个愚人伍达夷将要不如理地插嘴。』阿难,游方者波塔利子从一开始就是问三种受。阿难,如果这个愚人沙密地被游方者波塔利子如此问时如此解答:『贤友波塔利子,以身、以语、以意造了有意的、应受乐的业,他感受乐;贤友波塔利子,以身、以语、以意造了有意的、应受苦的业,他感受苦;贤友波塔利子,以身、以语、以意造了有意的、应受不苦不乐的业,他感受不苦不乐』,阿难,这个愚人沙密地如此解答,就是对游方者波塔利子正确地解答。然而,阿难,那些外道游方者愚痴、不善巧,他们怎能知道如来的分别论论呢?阿难,如果你们听闻如来分别论分别论论就好了。」
‘‘Etassa, bhagavā, kālo, etassa, sugata, kālo yaṃ bhagavā mahākammavibhaṅgaṃ vibhajeyya . Bhagavato sutvā bhikkhū dhāressantī’’ti. ‘‘Tena hānanda, suṇāhi, sādhukaṃ manasi karohi; bhāsissāmī’’ti. ‘‘Evaṃ, bhante’’ti kho āyasmā ānando bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca –
「世尊,现在正是时候,善逝,现在正是时候,愿世尊分别论分别论论。听闻世尊所说后,诸比库将受持。」「那么,阿难,你听!你要善加作意!我要说了。」「是的,大德。」具寿阿难回答世尊。世尊说:
‘‘Cattārome, ānanda, puggalā santo saṃvijjamānā lokasmiṃ. Katame cattāro? Idhānanda, ekacco puggalo idha pāṇātipātī hoti, adinnādāyī hoti, kāmesumicchācārī hoti, musāvādī hoti, pisuṇavāco hoti, pharusavāco hoti, samphappalāpī hoti, abhijjhālu hoti, byāpannacitto hoti, micchādiṭṭhi hoti. So kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati.
「阿难,这四种人存在、出现于世间。哪四种呢?阿难,这里,某人是杀生者,是不与取者,是欲邪行者,是妄语者,是两舌者,是粗恶语者,是杂秽语者,是贪婪者,是有嗔恨心者,是邪见者。他身坏命终后,投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱。
‘‘Idha panānanda, ekacco puggalo idha pāṇātipātī hoti, adinnādāyī hoti, kāmesumicchācārī hoti, musāvādī hoti, pisuṇavāco hoti, pharusavāco hoti, samphappalāpī hoti, abhijjhālu hoti, byāpannacitto hoti, micchādiṭṭhi hoti. So kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati.
「然而,阿难,这里,某人是杀生者,是不与取者,是欲邪行者,是妄语者,是两舌者,是粗恶语者,是杂秽语者,是贪婪者,是有嗔恨心者,是邪见者。他身坏命终后,投生到善趣、天界。
‘‘Idhānanda, ekacco puggalo idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti, kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato hoti, musāvādā paṭivirato hoti, pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti, anabhijjhālu hoti, abyāpannacitto hoti, sammādiṭṭhi hoti. So kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati.
「阿难,这里,某人是离杀生者,是离不与取者,是离欲邪行者,是离妄语者,是离两舌者,是离粗恶语者,是离杂秽语者,是不贪婪者,是无嗔恨心者,是正见者。他身坏命终后,投生到善趣、天界。
‘‘Idha panānanda, ekacco puggalo idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti, kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato hoti, musāvādā paṭivirato hoti, pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, pharusāya vācāya paṭivirato hoti, samphappalāpā paṭivirato hoti, anabhijjhālu hoti, abyāpannacitto hoti, sammādiṭṭhi hoti. So kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati.
「然而,阿难,这里,某人是离杀生者,是离不与取者,是离欲邪行者,是离妄语者,是离两舌者,是离粗恶语者,是离杂秽语者,是不贪婪者,是无嗔恨心者,是正见者。他身坏命终后,投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱。
§301
‘‘Idhānanda, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṃ cetosamādhiṃ phusati yathāsamāhite citte dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena amuṃ puggalaṃ passati – idha pāṇātipātiṃ adinnādāyiṃ kāmesumicchācāriṃ musāvādiṃ pisuṇavācaṃ pharusavācaṃ samphappalāpiṃ abhijjhāluṃ byāpannacittaṃ micchādiṭṭhiṃ kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā passati apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapannaṃ. So evamāha – ‘atthi kira, bho, pāpakāni kammāni, atthi duccaritassa vipāko. Amāhaṃ puggalaṃ addasaṃ idha pāṇātipātiṃ adinnādāyiṃ…pe… micchādiṭṭhiṃ kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā passāmi apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapanna’nti. So evamāha – ‘yo kira, bho, pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī…pe… micchādiṭṭhi, sabbo so kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati. Ye evaṃ jānanti, te sammā jānanti; ye aññathā jānanti, micchā tesaṃ ñāṇa’nti . Iti so yadeva tassa sāmaṃ ñātaṃ sāmaṃ diṭṭhaṃ sāmaṃ viditaṃ tadeva tattha thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati – ‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’’’nti.
「阿难,在此,某位沙门或婆罗门,依热诚、依精勤、依专修、依不放逸、依如理作意,触证如是心定,以如是得定之心,以清净、超越人的天眼,见到某人——在此是杀生者、不与取者、欲邪行者、妄语者、两舌者、粗恶语者、杂秽语者、贪婪者、嗔恨心者、邪见者,身坏命终后,见到他投生于恶趣、苦界、堕处、地狱。他如此说:『确实有,尊者,诸恶业,有恶行的果报。我见到某人——在此是杀生者、不与取者……(中略)……邪见者,身坏命终后,我见到他投生于恶趣、苦界、堕处、地狱。』他如此说:『凡是,尊者,杀生者、不与取者……(中略)……邪见者,一切身坏命终后都投生于恶趣、苦界、堕处、地狱。如此知者,他们正确地知;若异此而知者,他们的智是错误的。』如此,他仅以自己所知、自己所见、自己所了知的,在那里以固执、执取、坚持而说:『唯此是真实,其余是虚妄。』」
‘‘Idha panānanda, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṃ cetosamādhiṃ phusati yathāsamāhite citte dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena amuṃ puggalaṃ passati – idha pāṇātipātiṃ adinnādāyiṃ…pe… micchādiṭṭhiṃ, kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā passati sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapannaṃ. So evamāha – ‘natthi kira, bho, pāpakāni kammāni, natthi duccaritassa vipāko. Amāhaṃ puggalaṃ addasaṃ – idha pāṇātipātiṃ adinnādāyiṃ…pe… micchādiṭṭhiṃ, kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā passāmi sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapanna’nti. So evamāha – ‘yo kira, bho, pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī…pe… micchādiṭṭhi, sabbo so kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati. Ye evaṃ jānanti te sammā jānanti; ye aññathā jānanti, micchā tesaṃ ñāṇa’nti. Iti so yadeva tassa sāmaṃ ñātaṃ sāmaṃ diṭṭhaṃ sāmaṃ viditaṃ tadeva tattha thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati – ‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’’’nti.
「然而,阿难,在此,某位沙门或婆罗门,依热诚、依精勤、依专修、依不放逸、依如理作意,触证如是心定,以如是得定之心,以清净、超越人的天眼,见到某人——在此是杀生者、不与取者……(中略)……邪见者,身坏命终后,见到他投生于善趣、天界。他如此说:『确实没有,尊者,诸恶业,没有恶行的果报。我见到某人——在此是杀生者、不与取者……(中略)……邪见者,身坏命终后,我见到他投生于善趣、天界。』他如此说:『凡是,尊者,杀生者、不与取者……(中略)……邪见者,一切身坏命终后都投生于善趣、天界。如此知者,他们正确地知;若异此而知者,他们的智是错误的。』如此,他仅以自己所知、自己所见、自己所了知的,在那里以固执、执取、坚持而说:『唯此是真实,其余是虚妄。』」
‘‘Idhānanda, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṃ cetosamādhiṃ phusati yathāsamāhite citte dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena amuṃ puggalaṃ passati – idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirataṃ adinnādānā paṭivirataṃ kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirataṃ musāvādā paṭivirataṃ pisuṇāya vācāya paṭivirataṃ pharusāya vācāya paṭivirataṃ samphappalāpā paṭivirataṃ anabhijjhāluṃ abyāpannacittaṃ sammādiṭṭhiṃ, kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā passati sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapannaṃ. So evamāha – ‘atthi kira, bho, kalyāṇāni kammāni, atthi sucaritassa vipāko. Amāhaṃ puggalaṃ addasaṃ – idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirataṃ adinnādānā paṭivirataṃ…pe… sammādiṭṭhiṃ, kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā passāmi sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapanna’nti. So evamāha – ‘yo kira, bho, pāṇātipātā paṭivirato adinnādānā paṭivirato…pe… sammādiṭṭhi sabbo so kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati. Ye evaṃ jānanti te sammā jānanti; ye aññathā jānanti, micchā tesaṃ ñāṇa’nti. Iti so yadeva tassa sāmaṃ ñātaṃ sāmaṃ diṭṭhaṃ sāmaṃ viditaṃ tadeva tattha thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati – ‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’’’nti.
「阿难,在此,某位沙门或婆罗门,依热诚、依精勤、依专修、依不放逸、依如理作意,触证如是心定,以如是得定之心,以清净、超越人的天眼,见到某人——在此是离杀生者、离不与取者、离欲邪行者、离妄语者、离两舌者、离粗恶语者、离杂秽语者、不贪婪者、无嗔恨心者、正见者,身坏命终后,见到他投生于善趣、天界。他如此说:『确实有,尊者,诸善业,有善行的果报。我见到某人——在此是离杀生者、离不与取者……(中略)……正见者,身坏命终后,我见到他投生于善趣、天界。』他如此说:『凡是,尊者,离杀生者、离不与取者……(中略)……正见者,一切身坏命终后都投生于善趣、天界。如此知者,他们正确地知;若异此而知者,他们的智是错误的。』如此,他仅以自己所知、自己所见、自己所了知的,在那里以固执、执取、坚持而说:『唯此是真实,其余是虚妄。』」
‘‘Idha panānanda, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya padhānamanvāya anuyogamanvāya appamādamanvāya sammāmanasikāramanvāya tathārūpaṃ cetosamādhiṃ phusati yathāsamāhite citte dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena amuṃ puggalaṃ passati – idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirataṃ…pe… sammādiṭṭhiṃ, kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā passati apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapannaṃ. So evamāha – ‘natthi kira, bho kalyāṇāni kammāni, natthi sucaritassa vipāko. Amāhaṃ puggalaṃ addasaṃ – idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirataṃ adinnādānā paṭivirataṃ…pe… sammādiṭṭhiṃ, kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā passāmi apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapanna’nti. So evamāha – ‘yo kira, bho, pāṇātipātā paṭivirato adinnādānā paṭivirato…pe… sammādiṭṭhi, sabbo so kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati. Ye evaṃ jānanti te sammā jānanti; ye aññathā jānanti, micchā tesaṃ ñāṇa’nti. Iti so yadeva tassa sāmaṃ ñātaṃ sāmaṃ diṭṭhaṃ sāmaṃ viditaṃ tadeva tattha thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati – ‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’’’nti.
「然而,阿难,在此,某位沙门或婆罗门,依热诚、依精勤、依专修、依不放逸、依如理作意,触证如是心定,以如是得定之心,以清净、超越人的天眼,见到某人——在此是离杀生者……(中略)……正见者,身坏命终后,见到他投生于恶趣、苦界、堕处、地狱。他如此说:『确实没有,尊者,诸善业,没有善行的果报。我见到某人——在此是离杀生者、离不与取者……(中略)……正见者,身坏命终后,我见到他投生于恶趣、苦界、堕处、地狱。』他如此说:『凡是,尊者,离杀生者、离不与取者……(中略)……正见者,一切身坏命终后都投生于恶趣、苦界、堕处、地狱。如此知者,他们正确地知;若异此而知者,他们的智是错误的。』如此,他仅以自己所知、自己所见、自己所了知的,在那里以固执、执取、坚持而说:『唯此是真实,其余是虚妄。』」
§302
‘‘Tatrānanda, yvāyaṃ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evamāha – ‘atthi kira, bho, pāpakāni kammāni, atthi duccaritassa vipāko’ti idamassa anujānāmi; yampi so evamāha – ‘amāhaṃ puggalaṃ addasaṃ – idha pāṇātipātiṃ adinnādāyiṃ…pe… micchādiṭṭhiṃ, kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā passāmi apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapanna’nti idampissa anujānāmi; yañca kho so evamāha – ‘yo kira, bho, pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī…pe… micchādiṭṭhi, sabbo so kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjatī’ti idamassa nānujānāmi; yampi so evamāha – ‘ye evaṃ jānanti te sammā jānanti; ye aññathā jānanti, micchā tesaṃ ñāṇa’nti idampissa nānujānāmi; yampi so yadeva tassa sāmaṃ ñātaṃ sāmaṃ diṭṭhaṃ sāmaṃ viditaṃ tadeva tattha thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati – ‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’nti idampissa nānujānāmi. Taṃ kissa hetu? Aññathā hi, ānanda, tathāgatassa mahākammavibhaṅge ñāṇaṃ hoti.
「阿难,在那里,凡彼沙门或婆罗门如此说:『确实有,尊者,诸恶业,有恶行的果报』,我认可他这个;凡他如此说:『我见到某人——在此是杀生者、不与取者……(中略)……邪见者,身坏命终后,我见到他投生于恶趣、苦界、堕处、地狱』,我认可他这个;然而凡他如此说:『凡是,尊者,杀生者、不与取者……(中略)……邪见者,一切身坏命终后都投生于恶趣、苦界、堕处、地狱』,我不认可他这个;凡他如此说:『如此知者,他们正确地知;若异此而知者,他们的智是错误的』,我不认可他这个;凡他仅以自己所知、自己所见、自己所了知的,在那里以固执、执取、坚持而说:『唯此是真实,其余是虚妄』,我不认可他这个。那是什么原因?阿难,因为如来对分别论论有不同的智。」
‘‘Tatrānanda, yvāyaṃ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evamāha – ‘natthi kira, bho, pāpakāni kammāni, natthi duccaritassa vipāko’ti idamassa nānujānāmi; yañca kho so evamāha – ‘amāhaṃ puggalaṃ addasaṃ – idha pāṇātipātiṃ adinnādāyiṃ…pe… micchādiṭṭhiṃ kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā passāmi sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapanna’nti idamassa anujānāmi; yañca kho so evamāha – ‘yo kira, bho, pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī…pe… micchādiṭṭhi, sabbo so kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjatī’ti idamassa nānujānāmi; yampi so evamāha – ‘ye evaṃ jānanti te sammā jānanti; ye aññathā jānanti, micchā tesaṃ ñāṇa’nti idampissa nānujānāmi; yampi so yadeva tassa sāmaṃ ñātaṃ sāmaṃ diṭṭhaṃ sāmaṃ viditaṃ tadeva tattha thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati – ‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’nti idampissa nānujānāmi. Taṃ kissa hetu? Aññathā hi, ānanda, tathāgatassa mahākammavibhaṅge ñāṇaṃ hoti.
「阿难,在那里,凡彼沙门或婆罗门如此说:『确实没有,尊者,诸恶业,没有恶行的果报』,我不认可他这个;然而凡他如此说:『我见到某人——在此是杀生者、不与取者……(中略)……邪见者,身坏命终后,我见到他投生于善趣、天界』,我认可他这个;然而凡他如此说:『凡是,尊者,杀生者、不与取者……(中略)……邪见者,一切身坏命终后都投生于善趣、天界』,我不认可他这个;凡他如此说:『如此知者,他们正确地知;若异此而知者,他们的智是错误的』,我不认可他这个;凡他仅以自己所知、自己所见、自己所了知的,在那里以固执、执取、坚持而说:『唯此是真实,其余是虚妄』,我不认可他这个。那是什么原因?阿难,因为如来对分别论论有不同的智。」
‘‘Tatrānanda, yvāyaṃ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evamāha – ‘atthi kira, bho, kalyāṇāni kammāni, atthi sucaritassa vipāko’ti idamassa anujānāmi; yampi so evamāha – ‘amāhaṃ puggalaṃ addasaṃ – idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirataṃ adinnādānā paṭivirataṃ…pe… sammādiṭṭhiṃ, kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā passāmi sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapanna’nti idampissa anujānāmi; yañca kho so evamāha – ‘yo kira, bho, pāṇātipātā paṭivirato adinnādānā paṭivirato…pe… sammādiṭṭhi, sabbo so kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjatī’ti idamassa nānujānāmi; yampi so evamāha – ‘ye evaṃ jānanti te sammā jānanti; ye aññathā jānanti, micchā tesaṃ ñāṇa’nti idampissa nānujānāmi; yampi so yadeva tassa sāmaṃ ñātaṃ sāmaṃ diṭṭhaṃ sāmaṃ viditaṃ tadeva tattha thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati – ‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’nti idampissa nānujānāmi. Taṃ kissa hetu? Aññathā hi, ānanda, tathāgatassa mahākammavibhaṅge ñāṇaṃ hoti.
「阿难,在那里,凡彼沙门或婆罗门如此说:『确实有,尊者,诸善业,有善行的果报』,我认可他这个;凡他如此说:『我见到某人——在此是离杀生者、离不与取者……(中略)……正见者,身坏命终后,我见到他投生于善趣、天界』,我认可他这个;然而凡他如此说:『凡是,尊者,离杀生者、离不与取者……(中略)……正见者,一切身坏命终后都投生于善趣、天界』,我不认可他这个;凡他如此说:『如此知者,他们正确地知;若异此而知者,他们的智是错误的』,我不认可他这个;凡他仅以自己所知、自己所见、自己所了知的,在那里以固执、执取、坚持而说:『唯此是真实,其余是虚妄』,我不认可他这个。那是什么原因?阿难,因为如来对分别论论有不同的智。」
‘‘Tatrānanda, yvāyaṃ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evamāha – ‘natthi kira, bho, kalyāṇāni kammāni, natthi sucaritassa vipāko’ti idamassa nānujānāmi; yañca kho so evamāha – ‘amāhaṃ puggalaṃ addasaṃ – idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirataṃ adinnādānā paṭivirataṃ…pe… sammādiṭṭhiṃ, kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā passāmi apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapanna’nti idamassa anujānāmi; yañca kho so evamāha – ‘yo kira, bho, pāṇātipātā paṭivirato adinnādānā paṭivirato…pe… sammādiṭṭhi, sabbo so kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjatī’ti idamassa nānujānāmi; yañca kho so evamāha – ‘ye evaṃ jānanti te sammā jānanti; ye aññathā jānanti, micchā tesaṃ ñāṇa’nti idampissa nānujānāmi; yampi so yadeva tassa sāmaṃ ñātaṃ sāmaṃ diṭṭhaṃ sāmaṃ viditaṃ tadeva tattha thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati – ‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’nti idampissa nānujānāmi. Taṃ kissa hetu? Aññathā hi, ānanda, tathāgatassa mahākammavibhaṅge ñāṇaṃ hoti.
「阿难,在那里,凡彼沙门或婆罗门如此说:『确实没有,尊者,诸善业,没有善行的果报』,我不认可他这个;然而凡他如此说:『我见到某人——在此是离杀生者、离不与取者……(中略)……正见者,身坏命终后,我见到他投生于恶趣、苦界、堕处、地狱』,我认可他这个;然而凡他如此说:『凡是,尊者,离杀生者、离不与取者……(中略)……正见者,一切身坏命终后都投生于恶趣、苦界、堕处、地狱』,我不认可他这个;然而凡他如此说:『如此知者,他们正确地知;若异此而知者,他们的智是错误的』,我不认可他这个;凡他仅以自己所知、自己所见、自己所了知的,在那里以固执、执取、坚持而说:『唯此是真实,其余是虚妄』,我不认可他这个。那是什么原因?阿难,因为如来对分别论论有不同的智。」
§303
‘‘Tatrānanda, yvāyaṃ puggalo idha pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī…pe… micchādiṭṭhi, kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati, pubbe vāssa taṃ kataṃ hoti pāpakammaṃ dukkhavedanīyaṃ, pacchā vāssa taṃ kataṃ hoti pāpakammaṃ dukkhavedanīyaṃ, maraṇakāle vāssa hoti micchādiṭṭhi samattā samādinnā. Tena so kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati. Yañca kho so idha pāṇātipātī hoti adinnādāyī hoti…pe… micchādiṭṭhi hoti tassa diṭṭheva dhamme vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti upapajja vā apare vā pariyāye.
「阿难,于此,凡此人于此杀生、不与取……乃至……邪见,身坏命终后投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱,或者他以前已造作了感受苦的恶业,或者他以后造作了感受苦的恶业,或者他临终时具足、执取邪见。因此,他身坏命终后投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱。而他于此杀生、不与取……乃至……邪见,他于现法中感受果报,或于来生,或于其他时机。」
‘‘Tatrānanda, yvāyaṃ puggalo idha pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī…pe… micchādiṭṭhi kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati, pubbe vāssa taṃ kataṃ hoti kalyāṇakammaṃ sukhavedanīyaṃ, pacchā vāssa taṃ kataṃ hoti kalyāṇakammaṃ sukhavedanīyaṃ, maraṇakāle vāssa hoti sammādiṭṭhi samattā samādinnā. Tena so kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati. Yañca kho so idha pāṇātipātī hoti adinnādāyī hoti…pe… micchādiṭṭhi hoti tassa diṭṭheva dhamme vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti upapajja vā apare vā pariyāye.
「阿难,于此,凡此人于此杀生、不与取……乃至……邪见,身坏命终后投生到善趣、天界,或者他以前已造作了感受乐的善业,或者他以后造作了感受乐的善业,或者他临终时具足、执取正见。因此,他身坏命终后投生到善趣、天界。而他于此杀生、不与取……乃至……邪见,他于现法中感受果报,或于来生,或于其他时机。」
‘‘Tatrānanda , yvāyaṃ puggalo idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirato adinnādānā paṭivirato…pe… sammādiṭṭhi, kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati, pubbe vāssa taṃ kataṃ hoti kalyāṇakammaṃ sukhavedanīyaṃ, pacchā vāssa taṃ kataṃ hoti kalyāṇakammaṃ sukhavedanīyaṃ, maraṇakāle vāssa hoti sammādiṭṭhi samattā samādinnā. Tena so kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati. Yañca kho so idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti…pe… sammādiṭṭhi hoti, tassa diṭṭheva dhamme vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti upapajja vā apare vā pariyāye.
「阿难,于此,凡此人于此离杀生、离不与取……乃至……正见,身坏命终后投生到善趣、天界,或者他以前已造作了感受乐的善业,或者他以后造作了感受乐的善业,或者他临终时具足、执取正见。因此,他身坏命终后投生到善趣、天界。而他于此离杀生、离不与取……乃至……正见,他于现法中感受果报,或于来生,或于其他时机。」
‘‘Tatrānanda , yvāyaṃ puggalo idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirato adinnādānā paṭivirato…pe… sammādiṭṭhi, kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati, pubbe vāssa taṃ kataṃ hoti pāpakammaṃ dukkhavedanīyaṃ, pacchā vāssa taṃ kataṃ hoti pāpakammaṃ dukkhavedanīyaṃ, maraṇakāle vāssa hoti micchādiṭṭhi samattā samādinnā. Tena so kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjati. Yañca kho so idha pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti…pe… sammādiṭṭhi hoti, tassa diṭṭheva dhamme vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti upapajja vā apare vā pariyāye.
「阿难,于此,凡此人于此离杀生、离不与取……乃至……正见,身坏命终后投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱,或者他以前已造作了感受苦的恶业,或者他以后造作了感受苦的恶业,或者他临终时具足、执取邪见。因此,他身坏命终后投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱。而他于此离杀生、离不与取……乃至……正见,他于现法中感受果报,或于来生,或于其他时机。」
‘‘Iti kho, ānanda, atthi kammaṃ abhabbaṃ abhabbābhāsaṃ, atthi kammaṃ abhabbaṃ bhabbābhāsaṃ, atthi kammaṃ bhabbañceva bhabbābhāsañca, atthi kammaṃ bhabbaṃ abhabbābhāsa’’nti.
「如此,阿难,有业无能力且显现无能力,有业无能力却显现有能力,有业有能力且显现有能力,有业有能力却显现无能力。」
Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā ānando bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandīti.
世尊如是说。具寿阿难心满意足,欢喜世尊所说。
Mahākammavibhaṅgasuttaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ. · 大业分别经完 第六
7. Saḷāyatanavibhaṅgasuttaṃ7. 六处分别经
§304
Evaṃ me sutaṃ – ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti. ‘‘Bhadante’’ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṃ. Bhagavā etadavoca – ‘‘saḷāyatanavibhaṅgaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi. Taṃ suṇātha, sādhukaṃ manasi karotha; bhāsissāmī’’ti. ‘‘Evaṃ, bhante’’ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṃ. Bhagavā etadavoca –
如是我闻:一时,世尊住在沙瓦提城揭德林给孤独园。于此,世尊称呼诸比库:「诸比库。」「尊者。」彼诸比库回答世尊。世尊如是说:「诸比库,我将为你们讲说分别论论。你们要谛听,善作意,我要说了。」「是的,尊者。」彼诸比库回答世尊。世尊如是说:
‘‘‘Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni veditabbāni, cha bāhirāni āyatanāni veditabbāni, cha viññāṇakāyā veditabbā, cha phassakāyā veditabbā, aṭṭhārasa manopavicārā veditabbā, chattiṃsa sattapadā veditabbā, tatra idaṃ nissāya idaṃ pajahatha, tayo satipaṭṭhānā yadariyo sevati yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇamanusāsitumarahati, so vuccati yoggācariyānaṃ anuttaro purisadammasārathī’ti – ayamuddeso saḷāyatanavibhaṅgassa.
「『应了知六内处,应了知六外处,应了知六识身,应了知六触身,应了知十八意行,应了知三十六有情句,于此,依此而舍断此,有三须跋,圣者依此而住,圣者依此而住时,导师堪能教诫众,他被称为调御者中无上的调御丈夫。』这是分别论论的总说。」
§305
‘‘‘Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni veditabbānī’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? ‘Cakkhāyatanaṃ sotāyatanaṃ ghānāyatanaṃ jivhāyatanaṃ kāyāyatanaṃ manāyatanaṃ – cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni veditabbānī’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「应当了知六内处」——如此,这确实已被说。缘于什么而说此?「眼处、耳处、鼻处、舌处、身处、意处——应当了知六内处」——如此,凡那所说,缘于此而说。
‘‘‘Cha bāhirāni āyatanāni veditabbānī’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ . Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? ‘Rūpāyatanaṃ saddāyatanaṃ gandhāyatanaṃ rasāyatanaṃ phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ dhammāyatanaṃ – cha bāhirāni āyatanāni veditabbānī’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「应当了知六外处」——如此,这确实已被说。缘于什么而说此?「色处、声处、香处、味处、触处、法处——应当了知六外处」——如此,凡那所说,缘于此而说。
‘‘‘Cha viññāṇakāyā veditabbā’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? ‘Cakkhuviññāṇaṃ sotaviññāṇaṃ ghānaviññāṇaṃ jivhāviññāṇaṃ kāyaviññāṇaṃ manoviññāṇaṃ – cha viññāṇakāyā veditabbā’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「应当了知六识身」——如此,这确实已被说。缘于什么而说此?「眼识、耳识、鼻识、舌识、身识、意识——应当了知六识身」——如此,凡那所说,缘于此而说。
‘‘‘Cha phassakāyā veditabbā’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? ‘Cakkhusamphasso sotasamphasso ghānasamphasso jivhāsamphasso kāyasamphasso manosamphasso – cha phassakāyā veditabbā’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「应当了知六触身」——如此,这确实已被说。缘于什么而说此?「眼触、耳触、鼻触、舌触、身触、意触——应当了知六触身」——如此,凡那所说,缘于此而说。
‘‘‘Aṭṭhārasa manopavicārā veditabbā’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? ‘Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā somanassaṭṭhānīyaṃ rūpaṃ upavicarati, domanassaṭṭhānīyaṃ rūpaṃ upavicarati, upekkhāṭṭhānīyaṃ rūpaṃ upavicarati. Sotena saddaṃ sutvā…pe… ghānena gandhaṃ ghāyitvā… jivhāya rasaṃ sāyitvā… kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṃ phusitvā… manasā dhammaṃ viññāya somanassaṭṭhānīyaṃ dhammaṃ upavicarati, domanassaṭṭhānīyaṃ dhammaṃ upavicarati, upekkhāṭṭhānīyaṃ dhammaṃ upavicarati. Iti cha somanassūpavicārā, cha domanassūpavicārā, cha upekkhūpavicārā, aṭṭhārasa manopavicārā veditabbā’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「应当了知十八意行」——如此,这确实已被说。缘于什么而说此?「以眼见色后,寻求喜处之色,寻求忧处之色,寻求舍处之色。以耳闻声后……以鼻嗅香后……以舌尝味后……以身触触后……以意识法后,寻求喜处之法,寻求忧处之法,寻求舍处之法。如此,六喜寻求、六忧寻求、六舍寻求,应当了知十八意行」——如此,凡那所说,缘于此而说。
§306
‘‘‘Chattiṃsa sattapadā veditabbā’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? Cha gehasitāni somanassāni, cha nekkhammasitāni somanassāni, cha gehasitāni domanassāni, cha nekkhammasitāni domanassāni, cha gehasitā upekkhā, cha nekkhammasitā upekkhā. Tattha katamāni cha gehasitāni somanassāni? Cakkhuviññeyyānaṃ rūpānaṃ iṭṭhānaṃ kantānaṃ manāpānaṃ manoramānaṃ lokāmisapaṭisaṃyuttānaṃ paṭilābhaṃ vā paṭilābhato samanupassato pubbe vā paṭiladdhapubbaṃ atītaṃ niruddhaṃ vipariṇataṃ samanussarato uppajjati somanassaṃ. Yaṃ evarūpaṃ somanassaṃ idaṃ vuccati gehasitaṃ somanassaṃ. Sotaviññeyyānaṃ saddānaṃ… ghānaviññeyyānaṃ gandhānaṃ… jivhāviññeyyānaṃ rasānaṃ… kāyaviññeyyānaṃ phoṭṭhabbānaṃ… manoviññeyyānaṃ dhammānaṃ iṭṭhānaṃ kantānaṃ manāpānaṃ…pe… somanassaṃ. Yaṃ evarūpaṃ somanassaṃ idaṃ vuccati gehasitaṃ somanassaṃ. Imāni cha gehasitāni somanassāni.
「应当了知三十六有情句」——如此,这确实已被说。缘于什么而说此?六依家之喜,六依出离之喜,六依家之忧,六依出离之忧,六依家之舍,六依出离之舍。于此,什么是六依家之喜?对于眼所识之色,可喜的、可爱的、合意的、可意的、与世间利益相应的,获得或从获得随观,或忆念以前已获得的、过去的、已灭的、已变易的,生起喜。凡如此之喜,此被称为依家之喜。对于耳所识之声……对于鼻所识之香……对于舌所识之味……对于身所识之触……对于意所识之法,可喜的、可爱的、合意的……喜。凡如此之喜,此被称为依家之喜。这些是六依家之喜。
‘‘Tattha katamāni cha nekkhammasitāni somanassāni? Rūpānaṃtveva aniccataṃ viditvā vipariṇāmavirāganirodhaṃ , ‘pubbe ceva rūpā etarahi ca sabbe te rūpā aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā’ti evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya passato uppajjati somanassaṃ. Yaṃ evarūpaṃ somanassaṃ idaṃ vuccati nekkhammasitaṃ somanassaṃ. Saddānaṃtveva… gandhānaṃtveva… rasānaṃtveva… phoṭṭhabbānaṃtveva… dhammānaṃtve aniccataṃ viditvā vipariṇāmavirāganirodhaṃ, ‘pubbe ceva dhammā etarahi ca sabbe te dhammā aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā’ti evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya passato uppajjati somanassaṃ. Yaṃ evarūpaṃ somanassaṃ idaṃ vuccati nekkhammasitaṃ somanassaṃ. Imāni cha nekkhammasitāni somanassāni.
于此,什么是六依出离之喜?了知诸色之无常性、变易、离贪、灭,「以前的诸色与现在的一切那些色都是无常、苦、变易之法」,如此以正慧如实见者,生起喜。凡如此之喜,此被称为依出离之喜。了知诸声之……了知诸香之……了知诸味之……了知诸触之……了知诸法之无常性、变易、离贪、灭,「以前的诸法与现在的一切那些法都是无常、苦、变易之法」,如此以正慧如实见者,生起喜。凡如此之喜,此被称为依出离之喜。这些是六依出离之喜。
§307
‘‘Tattha katamāni cha gehasitāni domanassāni? Cakkhuviññeyyānaṃ rūpānaṃ…pe… sotaviññeyyānaṃ saddānaṃ… ghānaviññeyyānaṃ gandhānaṃ… jivhāviññeyyānaṃ rasānaṃ… kāyaviññeyyānaṃ phoṭṭhabbānaṃ… manoviññeyyānaṃ dhammānaṃ iṭṭhānaṃ kantānaṃ manāpānaṃ manoramānaṃ lokāmisapaṭisaṃyuttānaṃ appaṭilābhaṃ vā appaṭilābhato samanupassato pubbe vā appaṭiladdhapubbaṃ atītaṃ niruddhaṃ vipariṇataṃ samanussarato uppajjati domanassaṃ. Yaṃ evarūpaṃ domanassaṃ idaṃ vuccati gehasitaṃ domanassaṃ. Imāni cha gehasitāni domanassāni.
于此,什么是六依家之忧?对于眼所识之色……对于耳所识之声……对于鼻所识之香……对于舌所识之味……对于身所识之触……对于意所识之法,可喜的、可爱的、合意的、可意的、与世间利益相应的,不获得或从不获得随观,或忆念以前未获得的、过去的、已灭的、已变易的,生起忧。凡如此之忧,此被称为依家之忧。这些是六依家之忧。
‘‘Tattha katamāni cha nekkhammasitāni domanassāni? Rūpānaṃtveva aniccataṃ viditvā vipariṇāmavirāganirodhaṃ, ‘pubbe ceva rūpā etarahi ca sabbe te rūpā aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā’ti evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya disvā anuttaresu vimokkhesu pihaṃ upaṭṭhāpeti – ‘kudāssu nāmāhaṃ tadāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharissāmi yadariyā etarahi āyatanaṃ upasampajja viharantī’ti iti anuttaresu vimokkhesu pihaṃ upaṭṭhāpayato uppajjati pihapaccayā domanassaṃ. Yaṃ evarūpaṃ domanassaṃ idaṃ vuccati nekkhammasitaṃ domanassaṃ. Saddānaṃtveva…pe… gandhānaṃtveva… rasānaṃtveva… phoṭṭhabbānaṃtveva… dhammānaṃtveva aniccataṃ viditvā vipariṇāmavirāganirodhaṃ, ‘pubbe ceva dhammā etarahi ca sabbe te dhammā aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā’ti evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya disvā anuttaresu vimokkhesu pihaṃ upaṭṭhāpeti – ‘kudāssu nāmāhaṃ tadāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharissāmi yadariyā etarahi āyatanaṃ upasampajja viharantī’ti iti anuttaresu vimokkhesu pihaṃ upaṭṭhāpayato uppajjati pihapaccayā domanassaṃ. Yaṃ evarūpaṃ domanassaṃ idaṃ vuccati nekkhammasitaṃ domanassaṃ. Imāni cha nekkhammasitāni domanassāni.
「在那里,什么是六种依出离的忧?了知诸色的无常性、变易、离贪、灭,以正慧如实见到『过去的诸色与现在的诸色,一切那些色都是无常、苦、变易法』,他对无上诸解脱生起渴望——『何时我才能证入并住于那处,那些圣者现在证入并住于那处』,如此对无上诸解脱生起渴望,以渴望为缘而生起忧。这样的忧被称为依出离的忧。了知诸声的无常性……了知诸香的无常性……了知诸味的无常性……了知诸触的无常性……了知诸法的无常性、变易、离贪、灭,以正慧如实见到『过去的诸法与现在的诸法,一切那些法都是无常、苦、变易法』,他对无上诸解脱生起渴望——『何时我才能证入并住于那处,那些圣者现在证入并住于那处』,如此对无上诸解脱生起渴望,以渴望为缘而生起忧。这样的忧被称为依出离的忧。这些是六种依出离的忧。」
§308
‘‘Tattha katamā cha gehasitā upekkhā? Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā uppajjati upekkhā bālassa mūḷhassa ( ) puthujjanassa anodhijinassa avipākajinassa anādīnavadassāvino assutavato puthujjanassa. Yā evarūpā upekkhā, rūpaṃ sā nātivattati. Tasmā sā upekkhā ‘gehasitā’ti vuccati. Sotena saddaṃ sutvā… ghānena gandhaṃ ghāyitvā… jivhāya rasaṃ sāyitvā… kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṃ phusitvā… manasā dhammaṃ viññāya uppajjati upekkhā bālassa mūḷhassa puthujjanassa anodhijinassa avipākajinassa anādīnavadassāvino assutavato puthujjanassa. Yā evarūpā upekkhā, dhammaṃ sā nātivattati. Tasmā sā upekkhā ‘gehasitā’ti vuccati. Imā cha gehasitā upekkhā.
「在那里,什么是六种依在家的舍?以眼见色后,生起舍于愚痴者、迷惑者、未调伏烦恼者、未调伏果报者、不见过患者、未闻者的凡夫。这样的舍不超越色。因此那舍被称为『依在家的』。以耳闻声后……以鼻嗅香后……以舌尝味后……以身触触后……以意识法后,生起舍于愚痴者、迷惑者、未调伏烦恼者、未调伏果报者、不见过患者、未闻者的凡夫。这样的舍不超越法。因此那舍被称为『依在家的』。这些是六种依在家的舍。」
‘‘Tattha katamā cha nekkhammasitā upekkhā? Rūpānaṃtveva aniccataṃ viditvā vipariṇāmavirāganirodhaṃ, ‘pubbe ceva rūpā etarahi ca sabbe te rūpā aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā’ti evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya passato uppajjati upekkhā. Yā evarūpā upekkhā, rūpaṃ sā ativattati. Tasmā sā upekkhā ‘nekkhammasitā’ti vuccati. Saddānaṃtveva… gandhānaṃtveva… rasānaṃtveva… phoṭṭhabbānaṃtveva… dhammānaṃtveva aniccataṃ viditvā vipariṇāmavirāganirodhaṃ, ‘pubbe ceva dhammā etarahi ca sabbe te dhammā aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā’ti evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya passato uppajjati upekkhā. Yā evarūpā upekkhā, dhammaṃ sā ativattati. Tasmā sā upekkhā ‘nekkhammasitā’ti vuccati. Imā cha nekkhammasitā upekkhā. ‘Chattiṃsa sattapadā veditabbā’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「在那里,什么是六种依出离的舍?了知诸色的无常性、变易、离贪、灭,以正慧如实见到『过去的诸色与现在的诸色,一切那些色都是无常、苦、变易法』,生起舍。这样的舍超越色。因此那舍被称为『依出离的』。了知诸声的无常性……了知诸香的无常性……了知诸味的无常性……了知诸触的无常性……了知诸法的无常性、变易、离贪、灭,以正慧如实见到『过去的诸法与现在的诸法,一切那些法都是无常、苦、变易法』,生起舍。这样的舍超越法。因此那舍被称为『依出离的』。这些是六种依出离的舍。『应了知三十六有情句』——如此所说的,正是依此而说。」
§309
‘‘Tatra idaṃ nissāya idaṃ pajahathā’’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ; kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? Tatra, bhikkhave, yāni cha nekkhammasitāni somanassāni tāni nissāya tāni āgamma yāni cha gehasitāni somanassāni tāni pajahatha, tāni samatikkamatha. Evametesaṃ pahānaṃ hoti, evametesaṃ samatikkamo hoti.
「『依此舍断此』——如此所说的,这是依什么而说?诸比库,在那里,依那六种依出离的喜,依靠那些,你们应舍断那六种依在家的喜,应超越那些。如此是它们的舍断,如此是它们的超越。」
‘‘Tatra, bhikkhave, yāni cha nekkhammasitāni domanassāni tāni nissāya tāni āgamma yāni cha gehasitāni domanassāni tāni pajahatha, tāni samatikkamatha. Evametesaṃ pahānaṃ hoti, evametesaṃ samatikkamo hoti.
「诸比库,在那里,依那六种依出离的忧,依靠那些,你们应舍断那六种依在家的忧,应超越那些。如此是它们的舍断,如此是它们的超越。」
‘‘Tatra, bhikkhave, yā cha nekkhammasitā upekkhā tā nissāya tā āgamma yā cha gehasitā upekkhā tā pajahatha, tā samatikkamatha. Evametāsaṃ pahānaṃ hoti, evametāsaṃ samatikkamo hoti.
「诸比库,在那里,依那六种依出离的舍,依靠那些,你们应舍断那六种依在家的舍,应超越那些。如此是它们的舍断,如此是它们的超越。」
‘‘Tatra, bhikkhave, yāni cha nekkhammasitāni somanassāni tāni nissāya tāni āgamma yāni cha nekkhammasitāni domanassāni tāni pajahatha, tāni samatikkamatha. Evametesaṃ pahānaṃ hoti, evametesaṃ samatikkamo hoti.
「诸比库,在那里,依那六种依出离的喜,依靠那些,你们应舍断那六种依出离的忧,应超越那些。如此是它们的舍断,如此是它们的超越。」
‘‘Tatra, bhikkhave, yā cha nekkhammasitā upekkhā tā nissāya tā āgamma yāni cha nekkhammasitāni somanassāni tāni pajahatha, tāni samatikkamatha. Evametesaṃ pahānaṃ hoti, evametesaṃ samatikkamo hoti.
「诸比库,在那里,依那六种依出离的舍,依靠那些,你们应舍断那六种依出离的喜,应超越那些。如此是它们的舍断,如此是它们的超越。」
§310
‘‘Atthi , bhikkhave, upekkhā nānattā nānattasitā, atthi upekkhā ekattā ekattasitā. Katamā ca, bhikkhave, upekkhā nānattā nānattasitā? Atthi, bhikkhave, upekkhā rūpesu, atthi saddesu , atthi gandhesu, atthi rasesu, atthi phoṭṭhabbesu – ayaṃ, bhikkhave, upekkhā nānattā nānattasitā. Katamā ca, bhikkhave, upekkhā ekattā ekattasitā? Atthi, bhikkhave, upekkhā ākāsānañcāyatananissitā, atthi viññāṇañcāyatananissitā, atthi ākiñcaññāyatananissitā, atthi nevasaññānāsaññāyatananissitā – ayaṃ, bhikkhave, upekkhā ekattā ekattasitā.
「诸比库,有依种种而住的种种舍,有依一而住的一舍。诸比库,什么是依种种而住的种种舍?诸比库,有对色的舍,有对声的舍,有对香的舍,有对味的舍,有对触的舍——诸比库,这是依种种而住的种种舍。诸比库,什么是依一而住的一舍?诸比库,有依空无边处的舍,有依识无边处的舍,有依无所有处的舍,有依非想非非想处的舍——诸比库,这是依一而住的一舍。」
‘‘Tatra, bhikkhave, yāyaṃ upekkhā ekattā ekattasitā taṃ nissāya taṃ āgamma yāyaṃ upekkhā nānattā nānattasitā taṃ pajahatha, taṃ samatikkamatha. Evametissā pahānaṃ hoti, evametissā samatikkamo hoti.
「诸比库,于此,依那依一而住的一舍,依靠那个,你们应舍断、应超越那依种种而住的种种舍。如此是它的舍断,如此是它的超越。」
‘‘Atammayataṃ, bhikkhave, nissāya atammayataṃ āgamma yāyaṃ upekkhā ekattā ekattasitā taṃ pajahatha, taṃ samatikkamatha. Evametissā pahānaṃ hoti, evametissā samatikkamo hoti. ‘Tatra idaṃ nissāya idaṃ pajahathā’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「诸比库,依无所成,依靠无所成,你们应舍断、应超越那依一而住的一舍。如此是它的舍断,如此是它的超越。『于此,依此而舍断此』——如此,凡所说的,缘此而说。」
§311
‘‘‘Tayo satipaṭṭhānā yadariyo sevati, yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇamanusāsitumarahatī’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ; kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? Idha, bhikkhave, satthā sāvakānaṃ dhammaṃ deseti anukampako hitesī anukampaṃ upādāya – ‘idaṃ vo hitāya, idaṃ vo sukhāyā’ti. Tassa sāvakā na sussūsanti, na sotaṃ odahanti, na aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhapenti , vokkamma ca satthusāsanā vattanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgato na ceva anattamano hoti, na ca anattamanataṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, anavassuto ca viharati sato sampajāno. Idaṃ, bhikkhave, paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ yadariyo sevati, yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇamanusāsitumarahati.
「『圣者亲近三种须跋,圣者亲近时,导师值得教诫众』——如此,凡所说的,这是缘什么而说?诸比库,于此,导师出于悲悯,为了利益,依悲悯而为弟子们说法——『这是为了你们的利益,这是为了你们的快乐』。他的弟子们不恭听,不倾耳,不现起了知之心,且背离导师的教诫而行。诸比库,于此,如来既不不悦,也不感受不悦,他无漏而住,具念、正知。诸比库,这是第一种须跋,圣者亲近,圣者亲近时,导师值得教诫众。」
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, satthā sāvakānaṃ dhammaṃ deseti anukampako hitesī anukampaṃ upādāya – ‘idaṃ vo hitāya, idaṃ vo sukhāyā’ti. Tassa ekacce sāvakā na sussūsanti, na sotaṃ odahanti, na aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhapenti, vokkamma ca satthusāsanā vattanti; ekacce sāvakā sussūsanti, sotaṃ odahanti, aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhapenti, na ca vokkamma satthusāsanā vattanti . Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgato na ceva anattamano hoti, na ca anattamanataṃ paṭisaṃvedeti; na ca attamano hoti, na ca attamanataṃ paṭisaṃvedeti. Anattamanatā ca attamanatā ca – tadubhayaṃ abhinivajjetvā upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, dutiyaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ yadariyo sevati, yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇamanusāsitumarahati.
「再者,诸比库,导师出于悲悯,为了利益,依悲悯而为弟子们说法——『这是为了你们的利益,这是为了你们的快乐』。他的一些弟子不恭听,不倾耳,不现起了知之心,且背离导师的教诫而行;一些弟子恭听,倾耳,现起了知之心,且不背离导师的教诫而行。诸比库,于此,如来既不不悦,也不感受不悦;既不欢悦,也不感受欢悦。舍断不悦与欢悦两者,他住于舍,具念、正知。诸比库,这称为第二种须跋,圣者亲近,圣者亲近时,导师值得教诫众。」
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, satthā sāvakānaṃ dhammaṃ deseti anukampako hitesī anukampaṃ upādāya – ‘idaṃ vo hitāya, idaṃ vo sukhāyā’ti. Tassa sāvakā sussūsanti, sotaṃ odahanti, aññācittaṃ upaṭṭhapenti, na ca vokkamma satthusāsanā vattanti. Tatra, bhikkhave, tathāgato attamano ceva hoti, attamanatañca paṭisaṃvedeti, anavassuto ca viharati sato sampajāno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, tatiyaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ yadariyo sevati, yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇamanusāsitumarahati. ‘Tayo satipaṭṭhānā yadariyo sevati, yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇamanusāsitumarahatī’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「再者,诸比库,导师出于悲悯,为了利益,依悲悯而为弟子们说法——『这是为了你们的利益,这是为了你们的快乐』。他的弟子们恭听,倾耳,现起了知之心,且不背离导师的教诫而行。诸比库,于此,如来欢悦,且感受欢悦,他无漏而住,具念、正知。诸比库,这称为第三种须跋,圣者亲近,圣者亲近时,导师值得教诫众。『圣者亲近三种须跋,圣者亲近时,导师值得教诫众』——如此,凡所说的,缘此而说。」
§312
‘‘‘So vuccati yoggācariyānaṃ anuttaro purisadammasārathī’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? Hatthidamakena, bhikkhave, hatthidammo sārito ekaṃyeva disaṃ dhāvati – puratthimaṃ vā pacchimaṃ vā uttaraṃ vā dakkhiṇaṃ vā. Assadamakena, bhikkhave, assadammo sārito ekaññeva disaṃ dhāvati – puratthimaṃ vā pacchimaṃ vā uttaraṃ vā dakkhiṇaṃ vā. Godamakena, bhikkhave, godammo sārito ekaṃyeva disaṃ dhāvati – puratthimaṃ vā pacchimaṃ vā uttaraṃ vā dakkhiṇaṃ vā. Tathāgatena hi, bhikkhave, arahatā sammāsambuddhena purisadammo sārito aṭṭha disā vidhāvati. Rūpī rūpāni passati – ayaṃ ekā disā; ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī bahiddhā rūpāni passati – ayaṃ dutiyā disā; subhantveva adhimutto hoti – ayaṃ tatiyā disā; sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati – ayaṃ catutthī disā; sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘anantaṃ viññāṇa’nti viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati – ayaṃ pañcamī disā; sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati – ayaṃ chaṭṭhī disā; sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati – ayaṃ sattamī disā; sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ upasampajja viharati – ayaṃ aṭṭhamī disā. Tathāgatena, bhikkhave, arahatā sammāsambuddhena purisadammo sārito imā aṭṭha disā vidhāvati. ‘So vuccati yoggācariyānaṃ anuttaro purisadammasārathī’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ idametaṃ paṭicca vutta’’nti.
「『他被称为应被调御者的无上调御丈夫御者』——如此,凡所说的。这是缘什么而说?诸比库,被象调御师所驱策的应调象只向一个方向奔跑——或东、或西、或北、或南。诸比库,被马调御师所驱策的应调马只向一个方向奔跑——或东、或西、或北、或南。诸比库,被牛调御师所驱策的应调牛只向一个方向奔跑——或东、或西、或北、或南。诸比库,然而被如来、阿拉汉、正等正觉者所驱策的应调丈夫向八个方向奔跑。有色者见诸色——这是第一个方向;于内无色想者见外诸色——这是第二个方向;只专注于净——这是第三个方向;完全超越诸色想,诸有对想灭没,不作意诸种种想,『虚空是无边的』,成就空无边处而住——这是第四个方向;完全超越空无边处,『识是无边的』,成就识无边处而住——这是第五个方向;完全超越识无边处,『无所有』,成就无所有处而住——这是第六个方向;完全超越无所有处,成就非想非非想处而住——这是第七个方向;完全超越非想非非想处,成就想受灭而住——这是第八个方向。诸比库,被如来、阿拉汉、正等正觉者所驱策的应调丈夫向这八个方向奔跑。『他被称为应被调御者的无上调御丈夫御者』——如此,凡所说的,缘此而说。」
Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti.
世尊如此说。那些比库们心悦,欢喜世尊所说。
Saḷāyatanavibhaṅgasuttaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ sattamaṃ. · 六处分别经完,第七
8. Uddesavibhaṅgasuttaṃ8. 略说分别经
§313
Evaṃ me sutaṃ – ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti. ‘‘Bhadante’’ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṃ. Bhagavā etadavoca – ‘‘uddesavibhaṅgaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi. Taṃ suṇātha, sādhukaṃ manasi karotha; bhāsissāmī’’ti. ‘‘Evaṃ, bhante’’ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṃ. Bhagavā etadavoca –
如是我闻——一时,世尊住在沙瓦提城揭德林给孤独园。在那里,世尊称呼诸比库:「诸比库。」「尊者。」那些比库回答世尊。世尊如此说:
‘‘Tathā tathā, bhikkhave, bhikkhu upaparikkheyya yathā yathā upaparikkhato bahiddhā cassa viññāṇaṃ avikkhittaṃ avisaṭaṃ, ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhitaṃ anupādāya na paritasseyya. Bahiddhā, bhikkhave, viññāṇe avikkhitte avisaṭe sati ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhite anupādāya aparitassato āyatiṃ jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavo na hotī’’ti. Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṃ vatvāna sugato uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ pāvisi.
「诸比库,比库应当如此如此地观察,当如此如此观察时,他的识在外不散乱、不流散,在内不住立,由于不执取而不战栗。诸比库,当识在外不散乱、不流散,在内不住立,由于不执取而不战栗时,未来就没有生、老、死、苦的集起与生成。」世尊说了这个。说了这个之后,善逝从座起立,进入住所。
§314
Atha kho tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ, acirapakkantassa bhagavato, etadahosi – ‘‘idaṃ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṃ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ paviṭṭho – ‘tathā tathā, bhikkhave , bhikkhu upaparikkheyya yathā yathā upaparikkhato bahiddhā cassa viññāṇaṃ avikkhittaṃ avisaṭaṃ, ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhitaṃ anupādāya na paritasseyya. Bahiddhā , bhikkhave, viññāṇe avikkhitte avisaṭe sati ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhite anupādāya aparitassato āyatiṃ jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavo na hotī’ti. Ko nu kho imassa bhagavatā saṃkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajeyyā’’ti? Atha kho tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ etadahosi – ‘‘ayaṃ kho āyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṃvaṇṇito sambhāvito ca viññūnaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ; pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṃkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajituṃ. Yaṃnūna mayaṃ yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkameyyāma; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṃ mahākaccānaṃ etamatthaṃ paṭipuccheyyāmā’’ti.
那时,在世尊离去不久,那些比库们生起了这样的想法:「诸具寿,世尊简略地教诫了教诫,没有详细地解释义理,就从座起立,进入住所:『诸比库,比库应当如此如此地观察,当如此如此观察时,他的识在外不散乱、不流散,在内不住立,由于不执取而不战栗。诸比库,当识在外不散乱、不流散,在内不住立,由于不执取而不战栗时,未来就没有生、老、死、苦的集起与生成。』谁能详细地解释这个世尊简略教诫的、没有详细解释的义理呢?」那时,那些比库们生起了这样的想法:「这位具寿马哈咖吒亚那既受到导师的称赞,也受到有智慧的同梵行者们的尊重;具寿马哈咖吒亚那能够详细地解释这个世尊简略教诫的、没有详细解释的义理。我们何不前往具寿马哈咖吒亚那那里;前往后,向具寿马哈咖吒亚那询问这个义理呢?」
Atha kho te bhikkhū yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkamiṃsu; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā mahākaccānena saddhiṃ sammodiṃsu. Sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ vītisāretvā ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Ekamantaṃ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū āyasmantaṃ mahākaccānaṃ etadavocuṃ –
那时,那些比库们前往具寿马哈咖吒亚那那里;前往后,与具寿马哈咖吒亚那互相问候。交换了值得欢迎、值得忆念的话语后,在一旁坐下。在一旁坐下的那些比库们对具寿马哈咖吒亚那如此说:
‘‘Idaṃ kho no, āvuso kaccāna, bhagavā saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṃ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ paviṭṭho – ‘tathā tathā, bhikkhave, bhikkhu upaparikkheyya yathā yathā upaparikkhato bahiddhā cassa viññāṇaṃ avikkhittaṃ avisaṭaṃ, ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhitaṃ anupādāya na paritasseyya. Bahiddhā, bhikkhave, viññāṇe avikkhitte avisaṭe sati ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhite anupādāya aparitassato āyatiṃ jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavo na hotī’ti. Tesaṃ no, āvuso kaccāna, amhākaṃ, acirapakkantassa bhagavato, etadahosi – ‘idaṃ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṃ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ paviṭṭho – tathā tathā, bhikkhave, bhikkhu upaparikkheyya, yathā yathā upaparikkhato bahiddhā cassa viññāṇaṃ avikkhittaṃ avisaṭaṃ ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhitaṃ anupādāya na paritasseyya. Bahiddhā, bhikkhave, viññāṇe avikkhitte avisaṭe sati ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhite anupādāya aparitassato āyatiṃ jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavo na hotī’ti. Ko nu kho imassa bhagavatā saṃkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajeyyā’’ti. ‘‘Tesaṃ no, āvuso kaccāna, amhākaṃ etadahosi – ‘ayaṃ kho āyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṃvaṇṇito, sambhāvito ca viññūnaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ. Pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṃkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajituṃ. Yaṃnūna mayaṃ yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkameyyāma; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṃ mahākaccānaṃ etamatthaṃ paṭipuccheyyāmā’ti – vibhajatāyasmā mahākaccāno’’ti.
「具寿咖吒亚那,世尊简略地教诫了教诫,没有详细地解释义理,就从座起立,进入住所:『诸比库,比库应当如此如此地观察,当如此如此观察时,他的识在外不散乱、不流散,在内不住立,由于不执取而不战栗。诸比库,当识在外不散乱、不流散,在内不住立,由于不执取而不战栗时,未来就没有生、老、死、苦的集起与生成。』具寿咖吒亚那,在世尊离去不久,我们生起了这样的想法:『诸具寿,世尊简略地教诫了教诫,没有详细地解释义理,就从座起立,进入住所:诸比库,比库应当如此如此地观察,当如此如此观察时,他的识在外不散乱、不流散,在内不住立,由于不执取而不战栗。诸比库,当识在外不散乱、不流散,在内不住立,由于不执取而不战栗时,未来就没有生、老、死、苦的集起与生成。谁能详细地解释这个世尊简略教诫的、没有详细解释的义理呢?』具寿咖吒亚那,我们生起了这样的想法:『这位具寿马哈咖吒亚那既受到导师的称赞,也受到有智慧的同梵行者们的尊重。具寿马哈咖吒亚那能够详细地解释这个世尊简略教诫的、没有详细解释的义理。我们何不前往具寿马哈咖吒亚那那里;前往后,向具寿马哈咖吒亚那询问这个义理呢?』愿具寿马哈咖吒亚那解释。」
§315
‘‘‘Seyyathāpi, āvuso, puriso sāratthiko sāragavesī sārapariyesanaṃ caramāno mahato rukkhassa tiṭṭhato sāravato atikkammeva mūlaṃ atikkamma khandhaṃ sākhāpalāse sāraṃ pariyesitabbaṃ maññeyya, evaṃ sampadamidaṃ āyasmantānaṃ satthari sammukhībhūte taṃ bhagavantaṃ atisitvā amhe etamatthaṃ paṭipucchitabbaṃ maññatha. So hāvuso, bhagavā jānaṃ jānāti, passaṃ passati, cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto dhammabhūto brahmabhūto vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā amatassa dātā dhammassāmī tathāgato. So ceva panetassa kālo ahosi yaṃ bhagavantaṃyeva etamatthaṃ paṭipuccheyyātha; yathā vo bhagavā byākareyya tathā naṃ dhāreyyāthā’’’ti. ‘Addhāvuso kaccāna, bhagavā jānaṃ jānāti, passaṃ passati, cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto dhammabhūto brahmabhūto vattā pavattā atthassa ninnetā amatassa dātā dhammassāmī tathāgato. So ceva panetassa kālo ahosi yaṃ bhagavantaṃyeva etamatthaṃ paṭipuccheyyāma; yathā no bhagavā byākareyya tathā naṃ dhāreyyāma. Api cāyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṃvaṇṇito sambhāvito ca viññūnaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ. Pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṃkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajituṃ. Vibhajatāyasmā mahākaccāno agaruṃ karitvā’ti. ‘Tena hāvuso, suṇātha, sādhukaṃ manasi karotha; bhāsissāmī’ti. ‘Evamāvuso’ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato mahākaccānassa paccassosuṃ. Āyasmā mahākaccāno etadavoca –
「『诸具寿,譬如有人需要心材、寻求心材、到处寻找心材,来到有心材的大树前,越过了根,越过了树干,却认为应当在枝叶中寻找心材,这正是诸具寿的情况,你们面对导师时,越过了那位世尊,却认为应当向我们询问这个义理。诸具寿,那位世尊知而知,见而见,是眼、是智、是法、是梵,是说者、宣说者、义理的引导者、不死的施与者、法主、如来。那正是应当向世尊询问这个义理的时候;世尊如何解答,你们就应当如此受持。』『确实,具寿咖吒亚那,世尊知而知,见而见,是眼、是智、是法、是梵,是说者、宣说者、义理的引导者、不死的施与者、法主、如来。那正是应当向世尊询问这个义理的时候;世尊如何解答,我们就应当如此受持。但是具寿马哈咖吒亚那既受到导师的称赞,也受到有智慧的同梵行者们的尊重。具寿马哈咖吒亚那能够详细地解释这个世尊简略教诫的、没有详细解释的义理。愿具寿马哈咖吒亚那不以为难而解释。』『那么,诸具寿,你们听,善作意;我将说。』『是的,具寿。』那些比库回答具寿马哈咖吒亚那。具寿马哈咖吒亚那如此说:
‘Yaṃ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṃ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ paviṭṭho – tathā tathā, bhikkhave, bhikkhu upaparikkheyya, yathā yathā upaparikkhato bahiddhā cassa viññāṇaṃ avikkhittaṃ avisaṭaṃ ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhitaṃ anupādāya na paritasseyya, bahiddhā, bhikkhave, viññāṇe avikkhitte avisaṭe sati ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhite anupādāya aparitassato āyatiṃ jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavo na hotī’ti. Imassa kho ahaṃ, āvuso, bhagavatā saṃkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa evaṃ vitthārena atthaṃ ājānāmi.
「诸具寿,世尊简略地教诫了教诫,没有详细地解释义理,就从座起立,进入住所:『诸比库,比库应当如此如此地观察,当如此如此观察时,他的识在外不散乱、不流散,在内不住立,由于不执取而不战栗。诸比库,当识在外不散乱、不流散,在内不住立,由于不执取而不战栗时,未来就没有生、老、死、苦的集起与生成。』诸具寿,对于这个世尊简略教诫的、没有详细解释的义理,我如此详细地了知其义理。
§316
‘‘Kathañcāvuso, bahiddhā viññāṇaṃ vikkhittaṃ visaṭanti vuccati? Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā rūpanimittānusāri viññāṇaṃ hoti rūpanimittassādagadhitaṃ rūpanimittassādavinibandhaṃ rūpanimittassādasaṃyojanasaṃyuttaṃ bahiddhā viññāṇaṃ vikkhittaṃ visaṭanti vuccati. Sotena saddaṃ sutvā…pe… ghānena gandhaṃ ghāyitvā… jivhāya rasaṃ sāyitvā… kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṃ phusitvā… manasā dhammaṃ viññāya dhammanimittānusārī viññāṇaṃ hoti; dhammanimittassādagadhitaṃ dhammanimittassādavinibandhaṃ dhammanimittassādasaṃyojanasaṃyuttaṃ bahiddhā viññāṇaṃ vikkhittaṃ visaṭanti vuccati. Evaṃ kho āvuso, bahiddhā viññāṇaṃ vikkhittaṃ visaṭanti vuccati.
「诸具寿,如何说『识在外散乱、流散』呢?诸具寿,在这里,比库以眼见色后,识随逐于色相,被色相的味所束缚,被色相的味所系缚,与色相的味结相应,这被称为『识在外散乱、流散』。以耳听声后……以鼻嗅香后……以舌尝味后……以身触所触后……以意识法后,识随逐于法相,被法相的味所束缚,被法相的味所系缚,与法相的味结相应,这被称为『识在外散乱、流散』。诸具寿,如此被称为『识在外散乱、流散』。
§317
‘‘Kathañcāvuso, bahiddhā viññāṇaṃ avikkhittaṃ avisaṭanti vuccati ? Idhāvuso, bhikkhuno cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā na rūpanimittānusāri viññāṇaṃ hoti rūpanimittassādagadhitaṃ na rūpanimittassādavinibandhaṃ na rūpanimittassādasaṃyojanasaṃyuttaṃ bahiddhā viññāṇaṃ avikkhittaṃ avisaṭanti vuccati . Sotena saddaṃ sutvā…pe… ghānena gandhaṃ ghāyitvā… jivhāya rasaṃ sāyitvā… kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṃ phusitvā… manasā dhammaṃ viññāya na dhammanimittānusārī viññāṇaṃ hoti na dhammanimittassādagadhitaṃ na dhammanimittassādavinibandhaṃ na dhammanimittassādasaṃyojanasaṃyuttaṃ bahiddhā viññāṇaṃ avikkhittaṃ avisaṭanti vuccati. Evaṃ kho, āvuso, bahiddhā viññāṇaṃ avikkhittaṃ avisaṭanti vuccati.
「诸贤友,如何称为于外识不散乱、不流散?诸贤友,于此,比库以眼见色后,识不随逐于色相,不执取于色相之味,不系缚于色相之味,不结缚于色相之味的结缚,这称为于外识不散乱、不流散。以耳闻声……以鼻嗅香……以舌尝味……以身触所触……以意识法后,识不随逐于法相,不执取于法相之味,不系缚于法相之味,不结缚于法相之味的结缚,这称为于外识不散乱、不流散。诸贤友,如此称为于外识不散乱、不流散。」
§318
‘‘Kathañcāvuso, ajjhattaṃ saṇṭhitanti vuccati? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Tassa vivekajapītisukhānusāri viññāṇaṃ hoti vivekajapītisukhassādagadhitaṃ vivekajapītisukhassādavinibandhaṃ vivekajapītisukhassādasaṃyojanasaṃyuttaṃ ajjhattaṃ cittaṃ saṇṭhitanti vuccati.
「诸贤友,如何称为于内住立?诸贤友,于此,比库离诸欲,离诸不善法,有寻、有伺,离生喜、乐,证入初禅那而住。他的识随逐于离生喜乐,执取于离生喜乐之味,系缚于离生喜乐之味,结缚于离生喜乐之味的结缚,这称为于内心住立。」
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, āvuso, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā ajjhattaṃ sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāvaṃ avitakkaṃ avicāraṃ samādhijaṃ pītisukhaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Tassa samādhijapītisukhānusāri viññāṇaṃ hoti samādhijapītisukhassādagadhitaṃ samādhijapītisukhassādavinibandhaṃ samādhijapītisukhassādasaṃyojanasaṃyuttaṃ ajjhattaṃ cittaṃ saṇṭhitanti vuccati.
「再者,诸贤友,比库由于寻、伺的止息,内净,心专一性,无寻、无伺,定生喜、乐,证入第二禅那而住。他的识随逐于定生喜乐,执取于定生喜乐之味,系缚于定生喜乐之味,结缚于定生喜乐之味的结缚,这称为于内心住立。」
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, āvuso, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato ca sampajāno sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedeti, yaṃ taṃ ariyā ācikkhanti – ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Tassa upekkhānusāri viññāṇaṃ hoti upekkhāsukhassādagadhitaṃ upekkhāsukhassādavinibandhaṃ upekkhāsukhassādasaṃyojanasaṃyuttaṃ ajjhattaṃ cittaṃ saṇṭhitanti vuccati.
「再者,诸贤友,比库由于喜的离去,住于舍,具念、正知,以身受乐,诸圣者宣说:『舍、具念、乐住』,证入第三禅那而住。他的识随逐于舍,执取于舍乐之味,系缚于舍乐之味,结缚于舍乐之味的结缚,这称为于内心住立。」
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, āvuso, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṃ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Tassa adukkhamasukhānusāri viññāṇaṃ hoti adukkhamasukhassādagadhitaṃ adukkhamasukhassādavinibandhaṃ adukkhamasukhassādasaṃyojanasaṃyuttaṃ ajjhattaṃ cittaṃ saṇṭhitanti vuccati. Evaṃ kho, āvuso, ajjhattaṃ saṇṭhitanti vuccati.
「再者,诸贤友,比库由于乐的舍断与苦的舍断,先前喜、忧已灭没,不苦不乐,舍念清净,证入第四禅那而住。他的识随逐于不苦不乐,执取于不苦不乐之味,系缚于不苦不乐之味,结缚于不苦不乐之味的结缚,这称为于内心住立。诸贤友,如此称为于内住立。」
§319
‘‘Kathañcāvuso , ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhitanti vuccati? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Tassa na vivekajapītisukhānusāri viññāṇaṃ hoti na vivekajapītisukhassādagadhitaṃ na vivekajapītisukhassādavinibandhaṃ na vivekajapītisukhassādasaṃyojanasaṃyuttaṃ ajjhattaṃ cittaṃ asaṇṭhitanti vuccati.
「诸贤友,如何称为于内不住立?诸贤友,于此,比库离诸欲,离诸不善法……证入初禅那而住。他的识不随逐于离生喜乐,不执取于离生喜乐之味,不系缚于离生喜乐之味,不结缚于离生喜乐之味的结缚,这称为于内心不住立。」
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, āvuso, bhikkhu vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā…pe… dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Tassa na samādhijapītisukhānusāri viññāṇaṃ hoti na samādhijapītisukhassādagadhitaṃ na samādhijapītisukhassādavinibandhaṃ na samādhijapītisukhassādasaṃyojanasaṃyuttaṃ ajjhattaṃ cittaṃ asaṇṭhitanti vuccati .
「再者,诸贤友,比库由于寻、伺的止息……证入第二禅那而住。他的识不随逐于定生喜乐,不执取于定生喜乐之味,不系缚于定生喜乐之味,不结缚于定生喜乐之味的结缚,这称为于内心不住立。」
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, āvuso, bhikkhu pītiyā ca virāgā…pe… tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Tassa na upekkhānusāri viññāṇaṃ hoti na upekkhāsukhassādagadhitaṃ na upekkhāsukhassādavinibandhaṃ na upekkhāsukhassādasaṃyojanasaṃyuttaṃ ajjhattaṃ cittaṃ asaṇṭhitanti vuccati.
「再者,诸贤友,比库由于喜的离去……证入第三禅那而住。他的识不随逐于舍,不执取于舍乐之味,不系缚于舍乐之味,不结缚于舍乐之味的结缚,这称为于内心不住立。」
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, āvuso, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṃ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Tassa na adukkhamasukhānusāri viññāṇaṃ hoti na adukkhamasukhassādagadhitaṃ na adukkhamasukhassādavinibandhaṃ na adukkhamasukhassādasaṃyojanasaṃyuttaṃ ajjhattaṃ cittaṃ asaṇṭhitanti vuccati. Evaṃ kho, āvuso, ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhitanti vuccati.
「再者,贤友们,比库以舍断乐与舍断苦,先前喜忧已灭没故,证得不苦不乐、舍念清净的第四禅那而住。他的识不随逐不苦不乐,不贪著不苦不乐味,不系缚于不苦不乐味,不结缚于不苦不乐味的结缚,这称为内不住立。贤友们,如此称为内不住立。」
§320
‘‘Kathañcāvuso, anupādā paritassanā hoti? Idhāvuso, assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṃ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido ariyadhamme avinīto sappurisānaṃ adassāvī sappurisadhammassa akovido sappurisadhamme avinīto rūpaṃ attato samanupassati rūpavantaṃ vā attānaṃ attani vā rūpaṃ rūpasmiṃ vā attānaṃ. Tassa taṃ rūpaṃ vipariṇamati, aññathā hoti. Tassa rūpavipariṇāmaññathābhāvā rūpavipariṇāmānuparivatti viññāṇaṃ hoti. Tassa rūpavipariṇāmānuparivattajā paritassanā dhammasamuppādā cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti. Cetaso pariyādānā uttāsavā ca hoti vighātavā ca apekkhavā ca anupādāya ca paritassati. Vedanaṃ …pe… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassati viññāṇavantaṃ vā attānaṃ attani vā viññāṇaṃ viññāṇasmiṃ vā attānaṃ. Tassa taṃ viññāṇaṃ vipariṇamati, aññathā hoti. Tassa viññāṇavipariṇāmaññathābhāvā viññāṇavipariṇāmānuparivatti viññāṇaṃ hoti. Tassa viññāṇavipariṇāmānuparivattajā paritassanā dhammasamuppādā cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti. Cetaso pariyādānā uttāsavā ca hoti vighātavā ca apekkhavā ca anupādāya ca paritassati. Evaṃ kho, āvuso, anupādā paritassanā hoti.
「贤友们,什么是无取而战栗呢?贤友们,在此,未受教的凡夫,不见诸圣者,不熟练圣法,未受圣法调御,不见诸善人,不熟练善人法,未受善人法调御,他认为色是我,或我拥有色,或色在我中,或我在色中。他的那个色变易了,变异了。由于色的变易变异,随转于色变易的识生起。由色变易而生起的战栗诸法占据了心而住立。由于心被占据,他恐惧、苦恼、期望,并且无取而战栗。受……想……诸行……他认为识是我,或我拥有识,或识在我中,或我在识中。他的那个识变易了,变异了。由于识的变易变异,随转于识变易的识生起。由识变易而生起的战栗诸法占据了心而住立。由于心被占据,他恐惧、苦恼、期望,并且无取而战栗。贤友们,如此是无取而战栗。」
§321
‘‘Kathañcāvuso, anupādānā aparitassanā hoti? Idhāvuso, sutavā ariyasāvako ariyānaṃ dassāvī ariyadhammassa kovido ariyadhamme suvinīto sappurisānaṃ dassāvī sappurisadhammassa kovido sappurisadhamme suvinīto na rūpaṃ attato samanupassati na rūpavantaṃ vā attānaṃ na attani vā rūpaṃ na rūpasmiṃ vā attānaṃ. Tassa taṃ rūpaṃ vipariṇamati, aññathā hoti. Tassa rūpavipariṇāmaññathābhāvā na ca rūpavipariṇāmānuparivatti viññāṇaṃ hoti. Tassa na rūpavipariṇāmānuparivattajā paritassanā dhammasamuppādā cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti. Cetaso pariyādānā na cevuttāsavā hoti na ca vighātavā na ca apekkhavā anupādāya ca na paritassati. Na vedanaṃ… na saññaṃ… na saṅkhāre… na viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassati na viññāṇavantaṃ vā attānaṃ na attani vā viññāṇaṃ na viññāṇasmiṃ vā attānaṃ. Tassa taṃ viññāṇaṃ vipariṇamati, aññathā hoti. Tassa viññāṇavipariṇāmaññathābhāvā na ca viññāṇavipariṇāmānuparivatti viññāṇaṃ hoti. Tassa na viññāṇavipariṇāmānuparivattajā paritassanā dhammasamuppādā cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti. Cetaso pariyādānā na cevuttāsavā hoti na ca vighātavā na ca apekkhavā, anupādāya ca na paritassati. Evaṃ kho, āvuso, anupādā aparitassanā hoti.
「贤友们,什么是无取而不战栗呢?贤友们,在此,已受教的圣弟子,见诸圣者,熟练圣法,善受圣法调御,见诸善人,熟练善人法,善受善人法调御,他不认为色是我,不认为我拥有色,不认为色在我中,不认为我在色中。他的那个色变易了,变异了。由于色的变易变异,随转于色变易的识不生起。由色变易而生起的战栗诸法不占据心而住立。由于心不被占据,他既不恐惧,也不苦恼,也不期望,无取而不战栗。不认为受……不认为想……不认为诸行……不认为识是我,不认为我拥有识,不认为识在我中,不认为我在识中。他的那个识变易了,变异了。由于识的变易变异,随转于识变易的识不生起。由识变易而生起的战栗诸法不占据心而住立。由于心不被占据,他既不恐惧,也不苦恼,也不期望,无取而不战栗。贤友们,如此是无取而不战栗。」
‘‘Yaṃ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṃ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ paviṭṭho – ‘tathā tathā, bhikkhave, bhikkhu upaparikkheyya yathā yathā upaparikkhato bahiddhā cassa viññāṇaṃ avikkhittaṃ avisaṭaṃ, ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhitaṃ anupādāya na paritasseyya. Bahiddhā, bhikkhave, viññāṇe avikkhitte avisaṭe sati ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhite anupādāya aparitassato āyatiṃ jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavo na hotī’ti. Imassa kho ahaṃ, āvuso, bhagavatā saṃkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa evaṃ vitthārena atthaṃ ājānāmi. Ākaṅkhamānā ca pana tumhe āyasmanto bhagavantaṃyeva upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṃ paṭipuccheyyātha; yathā vo bhagavā byākaroti tathā naṃ dhāreyyāthā’’ti.
「贤友们,世尊简略地诵出教诫,未详细解释义理,即从座起进入住处——『诸比库,比库应当如此如此地观察,当如此如此观察时,他的识在外不散乱、不流散,在内不住立,无取而不战栗。诸比库,当识在外不散乱、不流散,在内不住立,无取而不战栗时,未来生老死苦集的生起就不存在』——对于世尊简略地诵出、未详细解释义理的这个教诫,我如此详细地了知其义理。贤友们,如果你们具寿希望的话,可以前往世尊处询问此义;世尊如何分别论,你们应当如此受持。」
§322
Atha kho te bhikkhū āyasmato mahākaccānassa bhāsitaṃ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Ekamantaṃ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṃ etadavocuṃ –
于是,那些比库随喜、欢喜具寿马哈咖吒亚那所说后,即从座起,前往世尊处;抵达后,礼敬世尊,坐于一旁。坐于一旁的那些比库对世尊如此说:
‘‘Yaṃ kho no, bhante, bhagavā saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṃ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ paviṭṭho – ‘tathā tathā, bhikkhave, bhikkhu upaparikkheyya yathā yathā upaparikkhato bahiddhā cassa viññāṇaṃ avikkhittaṃ avisaṭaṃ, ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhitaṃ anupādāya na paritasseyya. Bahiddhā, bhikkhave, viññāṇe avikkhitte avisaṭe sati ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhite anupādāya aparitassato āyatiṃ jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavo na hotī’’’ti.
「尊者,世尊简略地诵出教诫,未详细解释义理,即从座起进入住处——『诸比库,比库应当如此如此地观察,当如此如此观察时,他的识在外不散乱、不流散,在内不住立,无取而不战栗。诸比库,当识在外不散乱、不流散,在内不住立,无取而不战栗时,未来生老死苦集的生起就不存在』。」
‘‘Tesaṃ no, bhante, amhākaṃ, acirapakkantassa bhagavato, etadahosi – ‘idaṃ kho no, āvuso, bhagavā saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddisitvā vitthārena atthaṃ avibhajitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ paviṭṭho – tathā tathā, bhikkhave, bhikkhu upaparikkheyya, yathā yathā upaparikkhato bahiddhā cassa viññāṇaṃ avikkhittaṃ avisaṭaṃ, ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhitaṃ anupādāya na paritasseyya. Bahiddhā, bhikkhave, viññāṇe avikkhitte avisaṭe sati ajjhattaṃ asaṇṭhite anupādāya aparitassato āyatiṃ jātijarāmaraṇadukkhasamudayasambhavo na hotīti. Ko nu kho imassa bhagavatā saṃkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajeyyā’ti? Tesaṃ no, bhante, amhākaṃ etadahosi – ‘ayaṃ kho āyasmā mahākaccāno satthu ceva saṃvaṇṇito sambhāvito ca viññūnaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ. Pahoti cāyasmā mahākaccāno imassa bhagavatā saṃkhittena uddesassa uddiṭṭhassa vitthārena atthaṃ avibhattassa vitthārena atthaṃ vibhajituṃ. Yaṃnūna mayaṃ yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkameyyāma; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṃ mahākaccānaṃ etamatthaṃ paṭipuccheyyāmā’ti.
「尊者,世尊离去不久,我们生起这样的想法:『贤友们,世尊简略地诵出教诫,未详细解释义理,即从座起进入住处——诸比库,比库应当如此如此地观察,当如此如此观察时,他的识在外不散乱、不流散,在内不住立,无取而不战栗。诸比库,当识在外不散乱、不流散,在内不住立,无取而不战栗时,未来生老死苦集的生起就不存在。谁能详细解释世尊简略诵出、未详细解释义理的这个教诫的义理呢?』尊者,我们生起这样的想法:『这位具寿马哈咖吒亚那既为导师所称赞,也为有智的同梵行者所尊重。具寿马哈咖吒亚那能够详细解释世尊简略诵出、未详细解释义理的这个教诫的义理。我们何不前往具寿马哈咖吒亚那处;抵达后,向具寿马哈咖吒亚那询问此义呢?』」
‘‘Atha kho mayaṃ, bhante, yenāyasmā mahākaccāno tenupasaṅkamimha; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṃ mahākaccānaṃ etamatthaṃ paṭipucchimha. Tesaṃ no, bhante, āyasmatā mahākaccānena imehi ākārehi imehi padehi imehi byañjanehi attho vibhatto’’ti.
「尊者,于是我们前往具寿马哈咖吒亚那处;抵达后,向具寿马哈咖吒亚那询问此义。尊者,具寿马哈咖吒亚那以这些理由、这些句子、这些文句为我们分别论了义理。」
‘‘Paṇḍito, bhikkhave, mahākaccāno; mahāpañño, bhikkhave, mahākaccāno. Maṃ cepi tumhe, bhikkhave, etamatthaṃ paṭipuccheyyātha, ahampi evamevaṃ byākareyyaṃ yathā taṃ mahākaccānena byākataṃ. Eso cevetassa attho. Evañca naṃ dhāreyyāthā’’ti.
「诸比库,摩诃咖吒亚那是智者;诸比库,摩诃咖吒亚那是大慧者。诸比库,如果你们向我询问这个义理,我也会如摩诃咖吒亚那所分别论的那样分别论。这就是它的义理。你们应当如此受持。」
Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti.
世尊说此。那些比库心满意足,欢喜世尊所说。
Uddesavibhaṅgasuttaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ. · 略说分别经完,第八
9. Araṇavibhaṅgasuttaṃ9. 无诤分别经
§323
Evaṃ me sutaṃ – ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti. ‘‘Bhadante’’ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṃ. Bhagavā etadavoca – ‘‘araṇavibhaṅgaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi. Taṃ suṇātha, sādhukaṃ manasi karotha; bhāsissāmī’’ti. ‘‘Evaṃ, bhante’’ti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṃ. Bhagavā etadavoca –
如是我闻——一时,世尊住在沙瓦提城揭德林给孤独园。在那里,世尊称呼诸比库:「诸比库。」「尊者。」那些比库回答世尊。世尊如此说:「诸比库,我将为你们讲说分别论论。你们要听!要善作意!我要说了。」「是的,尊者。」那些比库回答世尊。世尊如此说:
‘‘Na kāmasukhamanuyuñjeyya hīnaṃ gammaṃ pothujjanikaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, na ca attakilamathānuyogamanuyuñjeyya dukkhaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ. Ete kho, bhikkhave , ubho ante anupagamma majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā, cakkhukaraṇī ñāṇakaraṇī upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati. Ussādanañca jaññā, apasādanañca jaññā; ussādanañca ñatvā apasādanañca ñatvā nevussādeyya, na apasādeyya , dhammameva deseyya. Sukhavinicchayaṃ jaññā; sukhavinicchayaṃ ñatvā ajjhattaṃ sukhamanuyuñjeyya. Rahovādaṃ na bhāseyya, sammukhā na khīṇaṃ bhaṇe. Ataramānova bhāseyya, no taramāno. Janapadaniruttiṃ nābhiniveseyya, samaññaṃ nātidhāveyyāti – ayamuddeso araṇavibhaṅgassa.
「不应从事于欲乐,那是低劣的、粗俗的、凡夫的、非圣的、无义利的;也不应从事于自我折磨之行,那是痛苦的、非圣的、无义利的。诸比库,如来不接近这两个极端,已正觉了中道,那能作眼、能作智,导向寂止、证智、正觉、涅槃。应知赞扬,应知贬抑;知赞扬与知贬抑后,既不应赞扬,也不应贬抑,只应说法。应知乐的抉择;知乐的抉择后,应于内从事于乐。不应说私下之语,不应当面说粗恶之语。应不急地说,不应急地说。不应执着地方语言,不应超越一般名称——这是分别论论的总说。
§324
‘‘‘Na kāmasukhamanuyuñjeyya hīnaṃ gammaṃ pothujjanikaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, na ca attakilamathānuyogamanuyuñjeyya dukkhaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhita’nti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ; kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? Yo kāmapaṭisandhisukhino somanassānuyogo hīno gammo pothujjaniko anariyo anatthasaṃhito, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Yo kāmapaṭisandhisukhino somanassānuyogaṃ ananuyogo hīnaṃ gammaṃ pothujjanikaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Yo attakilamathānuyogo dukkho anariyo anatthasaṃhito, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Yo attakilamathānuyogaṃ ananuyogo dukkhaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. ‘Na kāmasukhamanuyuñjeyya hīnaṃ gammaṃ pothujjanikaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, na ca attakilamathānuyogaṃ anuyuñjeyya dukkhaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhita’nti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「『不应从事于欲乐,那是低劣的、粗俗的、凡夫的、非圣的、无义利的;也不应从事于自我折磨之行,那是痛苦的、非圣的、无义利的』——如此已说;缘于什么而说呢?凡是从事于与欲相应的乐与喜悦,那是低劣的、粗俗的、凡夫的、非圣的、无义利的,这个法是有苦的、有恼害的、有热恼的、有烦热的;是邪道。凡是不从事于与欲相应的乐与喜悦,那是低劣的、粗俗的、凡夫的、非圣的、无义利的,这个法是无苦的、无恼害的、无热恼的、无烦热的;是正道。凡是自我折磨之行,那是痛苦的、非圣的、无义利的,这个法是有苦的、有恼害的、有热恼的、有烦热的;是邪道。凡是不从事于自我折磨之行,那是痛苦的、非圣的、无义利的,这个法是无苦的、无恼害的、无热恼的、无烦热的;是正道。『不应从事于欲乐,那是低劣的、粗俗的、凡夫的、非圣的、无义利的;也不应从事于自我折磨之行,那是痛苦的、非圣的、无义利的』——如此,凡是已说的,缘于此而说。
§325
‘‘‘Ete kho ubho ante anupagamma majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā, cakkhukaraṇī ñāṇakaraṇī upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattatī’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, seyyathidaṃ – sammādiṭṭhi , sammāsaṅkappo, sammāvācā, sammākammanto, sammāājīvo, sammāvāyāmo, sammāsati, sammāsamādhi. ‘Ete kho ubho ante anupagamma majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā, cakkhukaraṇī ñāṇakaraṇī upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattatī’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「『诸比库,如来不接近这两个极端,已正觉了中道,那能作眼、能作智,导向寂止、证智、正觉、涅槃』——如此已说。缘于什么而说呢?就是这圣八支道,即:正见、正思惟、正语、正业、正命、正精进、正念、正定。『诸比库,如来不接近这两个极端,已正觉了中道,那能作眼、能作智,导向寂止、证智、正觉、涅槃』——如此,凡是已说的,缘于此而说。
§326
‘‘‘Ussādanañca jaññā, apasādanañca jaññā; ussādanañca ñatvā apasādanañca ñatvā nevussādeyya, na apasādeyya, dhammameva deseyyā’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? Kathañca, bhikkhave, ussādanā ca hoti apasādanā ca, no ca dhammadesanā? ‘Ye kāmapaṭisandhisukhino somanassānuyogaṃ anuyuttā hīnaṃ gammaṃ pothujjanikaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sabbe te sadukkhā saupaghātā saupāyāsā sapariḷāhā micchāpaṭipannā’ti – iti vadaṃ ittheke apasādeti.
「『应知赞扬,应知贬抑;知赞扬与知贬抑后,既不应赞扬,也不应贬抑,只应说法』——如此已说。缘于什么而说呢?诸比库,如何是赞扬与贬抑,而不是说法呢?『凡是从事于与欲相应的乐与喜悦,那是低劣的、粗俗的、凡夫的、非圣的、无义利的,他们全都是有苦的、有恼害的、有热恼的、有烦热的、邪行者』——如此说时,某些人贬抑。
‘‘‘Ye kāmapaṭisandhisukhino somanassānuyogaṃ ananuyuttā hīnaṃ gammaṃ pothujjanikaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sabbe te adukkhā anupaghātā anupāyāsā apariḷāhā sammāpaṭipannā’ti – iti vadaṃ ittheke ussādeti.
「『凡是不从事于与欲相应的乐与喜悦,那是低劣的、粗俗的、凡夫的、非圣的、无义利的,他们全都是无苦的、无恼害的、无热恼的、无烦热的、正行者』——如此说时,某些人赞扬。
‘‘‘Ye attakilamathānuyogaṃ anuyuttā dukkhaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sabbe te sadukkhā saupaghātā saupāyāsā sapariḷāhā micchāpaṭipannā’ti – iti vadaṃ ittheke apasādeti.
「『凡是从事自我折磨之修习,苦的、非圣的、不具利益的,他们全都有苦、有害、有恼、有热恼、行于邪道』——如此说而某些人贬低。
‘‘‘Ye attakilamathānuyogaṃ ananuyuttā dukkhaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sabbe te adukkhā anupaghātā anupāyāsā apariḷāhā sammāpaṭipannā’ti – iti vadaṃ ittheke ussādeti.
「『凡是不从事自我折磨之修习,苦的、非圣的、不具利益的,他们全都无苦、无害、无恼、无热恼、行于正道』——如此说而某些人赞扬。
‘‘‘Yesaṃ kesañci bhavasaṃyojanaṃ appahīnaṃ, sabbe te sadukkhā saupaghātā saupāyāsā sapariḷāhā micchāpaṭipannā’ti – iti vadaṃ ittheke apasādeti.
「『凡是任何人未断有结,他们全都有苦、有害、有恼、有热恼、行于邪道』——如此说而某些人贬低。
‘‘‘Yesaṃ kesañci bhavasaṃyojanaṃ pahīnaṃ, sabbe te adukkhā anupaghātā anupāyāsā apariḷāhā sammāpaṭipannā’ti – iti vadaṃ ittheke ussādeti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, ussādanā ca hoti apasādanā ca, no ca dhammadesanā.
「『凡是任何人已断有结,他们全都无苦、无害、无恼、无热恼、行于正道』——如此说而某些人赞扬。诸比库,如此有赞扬与贬低,而非法的教导。
§327
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, nevussādanā hoti na apasādanā, dhammadesanā ca ? ‘Ye kāmapaṭisandhisukhino somanassānuyogaṃ anuyuttā hīnaṃ gammaṃ pothujjanikaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sabbe te sadukkhā saupaghātā saupāyāsā sapariḷāhā micchāpaṭipannā’ti – na evamāha. ‘Anuyogo ca kho, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā’ti – iti vadaṃ dhammameva deseti.
「诸比库,如何既非赞扬也非贬低,而是法的教导?『凡是从事欲乐相应的喜悦之修习,低劣的、粗俗的、凡夫的、非圣的、不具利益的,他们全都有苦、有害、有恼、有热恼、行于邪道』——不如此说。『此修习确实是有苦的法、有害的、有恼的、有热恼的;是邪道』——如此说而只是教导法。
‘‘‘Ye kāmapaṭisandhisukhino somanassānuyogaṃ ananuyuttā hīnaṃ gammaṃ pothujjanikaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sabbe te adukkhā anupaghātā anupāyāsā apariḷāhā sammāpaṭipannā’ti – na evamāha. ‘Ananuyogo ca kho, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā’ti – iti vadaṃ dhammameva deseti.
「『凡是不从事欲乐相应的喜悦之修习,低劣的、粗俗的、凡夫的、非圣的、不具利益的,他们全都无苦、无害、无恼、无热恼、行于正道』——不如此说。『不修习确实是无苦的法、无害的、无恼的、无热恼的;是正道』——如此说而只是教导法。
‘‘‘Ye attakilamathānuyogaṃ anuyuttā dukkhaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sabbe te sadukkhā saupaghātā saupāyāsā sapariḷāhā micchāpaṭipannā’ti – na evamāha. ‘Anuyogo ca kho , sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā’ti – iti vadaṃ dhammameva deseti.
「『凡是从事自我折磨之修习,苦的、非圣的、不具利益的,他们全都有苦、有害、有恼、有热恼、行于邪道』——不如此说。『此修习确实是有苦的法、有害的、有恼的、有热恼的;是邪道』——如此说而只是教导法。
‘‘‘Ye attakilamathānuyogaṃ ananuyuttā dukkhaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sabbe te adukkhā anupaghātā anupāyāsā apariḷāhā sammāpaṭipannā’ti – na evamāha. ‘Ananuyogo ca kho, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā’ti – iti vadaṃ dhammameva deseti.
「『凡是不从事自我折磨之修习,苦的、非圣的、不具利益的,他们全都无苦、无害、无恼、无热恼、行于正道』——不如此说。『不修习确实是无苦的法、无害的、无恼的、无热恼的;是正道』——如此说而只是教导法。
‘‘‘Yesaṃ kesañci bhavasaṃyojanaṃ appahīnaṃ, sabbe te sadukkhā saupaghātā saupāyāsā sapariḷāhā micchāpaṭipannā’ti – na evamāha . ‘Bhavasaṃyojane ca kho appahīne bhavopi appahīno hotī’ti – iti vadaṃ dhammameva deseti.
「凡任何有结未断者,一切都是有苦、有害、有恼、有热恼、行邪道」——并非如此说。「有结未断时,有也未断」——如此说者,只是说法而已。
‘‘‘Yesaṃ kesañci bhavasaṃyojanaṃ pahīnaṃ, sabbe te adukkhā anupaghātā anupāyāsā apariḷāhā sammāpaṭipannā’ti – na evamāha. ‘Bhavasaṃyojane ca kho pahīne bhavopi pahīno hotī’ti – iti vadaṃ dhammameva deseti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, nevussādanā hoti na apasādanā, dhammadesanā ca. ‘Ussādanañca jaññā, apasādanañca jaññā; ussādanañca ñatvā apasādanañca ñatvā nevussādeyya, na apasādeyya, dhammameva deseyyā’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「凡任何有结已断者,一切都是无苦、无害、无恼、无热恼、行正道」——并非如此说。「有结已断时,有也已断」——如此说者,只是说法而已。诸比库,如此既非赞扬也非贬抑,只是说法。「应知赞扬,应知贬抑;知赞扬、知贬抑后,既不应赞扬,也不应贬抑,只应说法」——如此所说,缘此而说。
§328
‘‘‘Sukhavinicchayaṃ jaññā; sukhavinicchayaṃ ñatvā ajjhattaṃ sukhamanuyuñjeyyā’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? Pañcime, bhikkhave, kāmaguṇā. Katame pañca? Cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṃhitā rajanīyā, sotaviññeyyā saddā… ghānaviññeyyā gandhā… jivhāviññeyyā rasā… kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṃhitā rajanīyā – ime kho, bhikkhave, pañca kāmaguṇā. Yaṃ kho, bhikkhave, ime pañca kāmaguṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṃ somanassaṃ idaṃ vuccati kāmasukhaṃ mīḷhasukhaṃ puthujjanasukhaṃ anariyasukhaṃ. ‘Na āsevitabbaṃ, na bhāvetabbaṃ, na bahulīkātabbaṃ, bhāyitabbaṃ etassa sukhassā’ti – vadāmi. Idha , bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā ajjhattaṃ sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāvaṃ avitakkaṃ avicāraṃ samādhijaṃ pītisukhaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati…pe… tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ… catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Idaṃ vuccati nekkhammasukhaṃ pavivekasukhaṃ upasamasukhaṃ sambodhisukhaṃ. ‘Āsevitabbaṃ, bhāvetabbaṃ, bahulīkātabbaṃ, na bhāyitabbaṃ etassa sukhassā’ti – vadāmi . ‘Sukhavinicchayaṃ jaññā ; sukhavinicchayaṃ ñatvā ajjhattaṃ sukhamanuyuñjeyyā’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「应知乐的抉择;知乐的抉择后,应于内修习乐」——如此所说。缘何而说?诸比库,有此五种欲功德。哪五种?眼识知的色,可爱、可喜、可意、可爱之色、与欲相应、能引染;耳识知的声……鼻识知的香……舌识知的味……身识知的触,可爱、可喜、可意、可爱之色、与欲相应、能引染——诸比库,这些是五种欲功德。诸比库,缘此五种欲功德而生起的乐与喜悦,这称为欲乐、杂染乐、凡夫乐、非圣乐。「不应亲近、不应修习、不应多作,应怖畏此乐」——我说。诸比库,于此,比库离诸欲,离诸不善法,有寻、有伺,离生喜乐,具足住于初禅那。寻伺止息故,内净、心专一性,无寻、无伺,定生喜乐,具足住于第二禅那。喜离故,住于舍……(中略)……第三禅那……具足住于第四禅那。这称为出离乐、远离乐、寂止乐、正觉乐。「应亲近、应修习、应多作,不应怖畏此乐」——我说。「应知乐的抉择;知乐的抉择后,应于内修习乐」——如此所说,缘此而说。
§329
‘‘‘Rahovādaṃ na bhāseyya, sammukhā na khīṇaṃ bhaṇe’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? Tatra, bhikkhave, yaṃ jaññā rahovādaṃ abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ sasakkaṃ taṃ rahovādaṃ na bhāseyya. Yampi jaññā rahovādaṃ bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ tassapi sikkheyya avacanāya. Yañca kho jaññā rahovādaṃ bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasaṃhitaṃ tatra kālaññū assa tassa rahovādassa vacanāya. Tatra, bhikkhave, yaṃ jaññā sammukhā khīṇavādaṃ abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ sasakkaṃ taṃ sammukhā khīṇavādaṃ na bhāseyya. Yampi jaññā sammukhā khīṇavādaṃ bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ tassapi sikkheyya avacanāya. Yañca kho jaññā sammukhā khīṇavādaṃ bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasaṃhitaṃ tatra kālaññū assa tassa sammukhā khīṇavādassa vacanāya. ‘Rahovādaṃ na bhāseyya, sammukhā na khīṇaṃ bhaṇe’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「不应说背后语,不应当面说粗恶语」——如此所说。缘何而说?诸比库,于此,若知背后语是不实、不真、无利益的,应能不说那背后语。若知背后语是真实、真确、无利益的,对那也应学习不说。若知背后语是真实、真确、有利益的,于此应知时说那背后语。诸比库,于此,若知当面粗恶语是不实、不真、无利益的,应能不说那当面粗恶语。若知当面粗恶语是真实、真确、无利益的,对那也应学习不说。若知当面粗恶语是真实、真确、有利益的,于此应知时说那当面粗恶语。「不应说背后语,不应当面说粗恶语」——如此所说,缘此而说。
§330
‘‘‘Ataramānova bhāseyya no taramāno’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? Tatra, bhikkhave, taramānassa bhāsato kāyopi kilamati, cittampi upahaññati , saropi upahaññati , kaṇṭhopi āturīyati, avisaṭṭhampi hoti aviññeyyaṃ taramānassa bhāsitaṃ. Tatra, bhikkhave, ataramānassa bhāsato kāyopi na kilamati, cittampi na upahaññati, saropi na upahaññati, kaṇṭhopi na āturīyati, visaṭṭhampi hoti viññeyyaṃ ataramānassa bhāsitaṃ. ‘Ataramānova bhāseyya, no taramāno’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「应不急促地说,不应急促地说」——如此所说。缘何而说?诸比库,于此,急促说话者,身也疲劳,心也受损,声也受损,喉咙也痛苦,急促说话者的话也不清晰、不易了知。诸比库,于此,不急促说话者,身也不疲劳,心也不受损,声也不受损,喉咙也不痛苦,不急促说话者的话也清晰、易了知。「应不急促地说,不应急促地说」——如此所说,缘此而说。
§331
‘‘‘Janapadaniruttiṃ nābhiniveseyya, samaññaṃ nātidhāveyyā’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? Kathañca, bhikkhave, janapadaniruttiyā ca abhiniveso hoti samaññāya ca atisāro? Idha, bhikkhave, tadevekaccesu janapadesu ‘pātī’ti sañjānanti, ‘patta’nti sañjānanti , ‘vitta’nti sañjānanti, ‘sarāva’nti sañjānanti ‘dhāropa’nti sañjānanti, ‘poṇa’nti sañjānanti, ‘pisīlava’nti sañjānanti. Iti yathā yathā naṃ tesu tesu janapadesu sañjānanti tathā tathā thāmasā parāmāsā abhinivissa voharati – ‘idameva saccaṃ , moghamañña’nti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, janapadaniruttiyā ca abhiniveso hoti samaññāya ca atisāro.
「不应执着地方语言,不应越过通用语」——如此所说。缘何而说?诸比库,如何是执着地方语言与越过通用语?诸比库,于此,在某些地方,同样的东西被称为「巴帝」,被称为「巴答」,被称为「维答」,被称为「沙拉瓦」,被称为「达罗巴」,被称为「波那」,被称为「毕西喇瓦」。如此,在那些地方如何如何被称呼,就强固地执取、固执地说——「唯此是真实,其余是虚妄」。诸比库,如此是执着地方语言与越过通用语。
§332
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, janapadaniruttiyā ca anabhiniveso hoti samaññāya ca anatisāro? Idha, bhikkhave, tadevekaccesu janapadesu ‘pātī’ti sañjānanti, ‘patta’nti sañjānanti, ‘vitta’nti sañjānanti, ‘sarāva’nti sañjānanti, ‘dhāropa’nti sañjānanti, ‘poṇa’nti sañjānanti, ‘pisīlava’nti sañjānanti. Iti yathā yathā naṃ tesu tesu janapadesu sañjānanti ‘idaṃ kira me āyasmanto sandhāya voharantī’ti tathā tathā voharati aparāmasaṃ. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, janapadaniruttiyā ca anabhiniveso hoti, samaññāya ca anatisāro. ‘Janapadaniruttiṃ nābhiniveseyya samaññaṃ nātidhāveyyā’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
诸比库,如何是不执着地方语言与不越过通用语?诸比库,于此,在某些地方,同样的东西被称为「巴帝」,被称为「巴答」,被称为「维答」,被称为「沙拉瓦」,被称为「达罗巴」,被称为「波那」,被称为「毕西喇瓦」。如此,在那些地方如何如何被称呼,「我的诸具寿们显然是指这个而说」,就如此说而不执取。诸比库,如此是不执着地方语言与不越过通用语。「不应执着地方语言,不应越过通用语」——如此所说,缘此而说。
§333
‘‘Tatra, bhikkhave, yo kāmapaṭisandhisukhino somanassānuyogo hīno gammo pothujjaniko anariyo anatthasaṃhito, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yo kāmapaṭisandhisukhino somanassānuyogaṃ ananuyogo hīnaṃ gammaṃ pothujjanikaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo.
诸比库,于此,凡随从欲乐、喜悦之乐者,是下劣的、粗俗的、凡夫的、非圣的、无利益的,此法是有苦、有害、有恼、有热恼;是邪道。因此,此法是有诤。诸比库,于此,凡不随从欲乐、喜悦之乐者——下劣的、粗俗的、凡夫的、非圣的、无利益的,此法是无苦、无害、无恼、无热恼;是正道。因此,此法是无诤。
§334
‘‘Tatra, bhikkhave, yo attakilamathānuyogo dukkho anariyo anatthasaṃhito, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yo attakilamathānuyogaṃ ananuyogo dukkhaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo.
「诸比库,于此,凡是从事自我折磨之苦的、非圣的、无义相应的,这是有苦的法、有恼害的、有热恼的、有热烧的;是邪道。因此,这是有诤之法。诸比库,于此,凡是不从事自我折磨之苦的、非圣的、无义相应的,这是无苦的法、无恼害的、无热恼的、无热烧的;是正道。因此,这是无诤之法。」
§335
‘‘Tatra, bhikkhave, yāyaṃ majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā, cakkhukaraṇī ñāṇakaraṇī upasamāya abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā . Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo.
「诸比库,于此,凡是如来所正觉的中道,作眼、作智,导向寂止、导向证智、导向正觉、导向涅槃,这是无苦的法、无恼害的、无热恼的、无热烧的;是正道。因此,这是无诤之法。」
§336
‘‘Tatra , bhikkhave, yāyaṃ ussādanā ca apasādanā ca no ca dhammadesanā, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yāyaṃ nevussādanā ca na apasādanā ca dhammadesanā ca, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo.
「诸比库,于此,凡是赞扬与贬低而非说法,这是有苦的法、有恼害的、有热恼的、有热烧的;是邪道。因此,这是有诤之法。诸比库,于此,凡是既非赞扬也非贬低而是说法,这是无苦的法、无恼害的、无热恼的、无热烧的;是正道。因此,这是无诤之法。」
§337
‘‘Tatra, bhikkhave, yamidaṃ kāmasukhaṃ mīḷhasukhaṃ pothujjanasukhaṃ anariyasukhaṃ , sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yamidaṃ nekkhammasukhaṃ pavivekasukhaṃ upasamasukhaṃ sambodhisukhaṃ, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo.
「诸比库,于此,凡是欲乐、愚痴乐、凡夫乐、非圣乐,这是有苦的法、有恼害的、有热恼的、有热烧的;是邪道。因此,这是有诤之法。诸比库,于此,凡是出离乐、远离乐、寂止乐、正觉乐,这是无苦的法、无恼害的、无热恼的、无热烧的;是正道。因此,这是无诤之法。」
§338
‘‘Tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṃ rahovādo abhūto ataccho anatthasaṃhito, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṃ rahovādo bhūto taccho anatthasaṃhito, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṃ rahovādo bhūto taccho atthasaṃhito, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo.
「诸比库,于此,凡是背后之语、非真实的、非真谛的、无义相应的,这是有苦的法、有恼害的、有热恼的、有热烧的;是邪道。因此,这是有诤之法。诸比库,于此,凡是背后之语、真实的、真谛的、无义相应的,这是有苦的法、有恼害的、有热恼的、有热烧的;是邪道。因此,这是有诤之法。诸比库,于此,凡是背后之语、真实的、真谛的、有义相应的,这是无苦的法、无恼害的、无热恼的、无热烧的;是正道。因此,这是无诤之法。」
§339
‘‘Tatra , bhikkhave, yvāyaṃ sammukhā khīṇavādo abhūto ataccho anatthasaṃhito, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṃ sammukhā khīṇavādo bhūto taccho anatthasaṃhito, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṃ sammukhā khīṇavādo bhūto taccho atthasaṃhito, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo.
「诸比库,于此,凡是当面诽谤之语、非真实的、非真谛的、无义相应的,这是有苦的法、有恼害的、有热恼的、有热烧的;是邪道。因此,这是有诤之法。诸比库,于此,凡是当面诽谤之语、真实的、真谛的、无义相应的,这是有苦的法、有恼害的、有热恼的、有热烧的;是邪道。因此,这是有诤之法。诸比库,于此,凡是当面诽谤之语、真实的、真谛的、有义相应的,这是无苦的法、无恼害的、无热恼的、无热烧的;是正道。因此,这是无诤之法。」
§340
‘‘Tatra, bhikkhave, yamidaṃ taramānassa bhāsitaṃ, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra, bhikkhave , yamidaṃ ataramānassa bhāsitaṃ, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo.
「诸比库,于此,凡是急躁者的言语,这是有苦的法、有恼害的、有热恼的、有热烧的;是邪道。因此,这是有诤之法。诸比库,于此,凡是不急躁者的言语,这是无苦的法、无恼害的、无热恼的、无热烧的;是正道。因此,这是无诤之法。」
§341
‘‘Tatra, bhikkhave, yvāyaṃ janapadaniruttiyā ca abhiniveso samaññāya ca atisāro, sadukkho eso dhammo saupaghāto saupāyāso sapariḷāho; micchāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo saraṇo. Tatra bhikkhave, yvāyaṃ janapadaniruttiyā ca anabhiniveso samaññāya ca anatisāro, adukkho eso dhammo anupaghāto anupāyāso apariḷāho; sammāpaṭipadā. Tasmā eso dhammo araṇo.
「诸比库,于此,凡是对地方语言的执着与对名称的超越,这是有苦的法、有恼害的、有热恼的、有热烧的;是邪道。因此,这是有诤之法。诸比库,于此,凡是对地方语言的不执着与对名称的不超越,这是无苦的法、无恼害的、无热恼的、无热烧的;是正道。因此,这是无诤之法。」
‘‘Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, ‘saraṇañca dhammaṃ jānissāma, araṇañca dhammaṃ jānissāma; saraṇañca dhammaṃ ñatvā araṇañca dhammaṃ ñatvā araṇapaṭipadaṃ paṭipajjissāmā’ti evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbaṃ. Subhūti ca pana, bhikkhave, kulaputto araṇapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno’’ti.
「诸比库!因此,在此,你们应当这样学习:『我们将了知有箭之法,将了知无箭之法;了知有箭之法与无箭之法后,我们将实行无箭之道。』诸比库!你们确实应当这样学习。诸比库!善现族姓子确实是实行无箭之道者。」
Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti.
世尊说此。那些比库满意欢喜世尊所说。
Araṇavibhaṅgasuttaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ navamaṃ. · 无诤分别经完,第九
10. Dhātuvibhaṅgasuttaṃ10. 界分别经
§342
Evaṃ me sutaṃ – ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā magadhesu cārikaṃ caramāno yena rājagahaṃ tadavasari; yena bhaggavo kumbhakāro tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhaggavaṃ kumbhakāraṃ etadavoca – ‘‘sace te, bhaggava, agaru viharemu āvesane ekaratta’’nti. ‘‘Na kho me, bhante, garu. Atthi cettha pabbajito paṭhamaṃ vāsūpagato. Sace so anujānāti, viharatha , bhante, yathāsukha’’nti.
如是我闻:一时,世尊在马嘎塔游行,抵达王舍城;前往陶师跋嘎瓦处;抵达后,对陶师跋嘎瓦这样说:「跋嘎瓦!如果你不嫌麻烦,我们将在工作坊住一夜。」「尊者!我不嫌麻烦。但这里有一位出家者先来住宿。如果他允许,尊者!请随意住。」
Tena kho pana samayena pukkusāti nāma kulaputto bhagavantaṃ uddissa saddhāya agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajito. So tasmiṃ kumbhakārāvesane paṭhamaṃ vāsūpagato hoti. Atha kho bhagavā yenāyasmā pukkusāti tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṃ pukkusātiṃ etadavoca – ‘‘sace te, bhikkhu, agaru viharemu āvesane ekaratta’’nti. ‘‘Urundaṃ, āvuso , kumbhakārāvesanaṃ. Viharatāyasmā yathāsukha’’nti.
尔时,有一位名叫普库沙帝的族姓子,为了世尊之故,以信从在家出家为无家,他先来住在那陶师工作坊。于是世尊前往具寿普库沙帝处;抵达后,对具寿普库沙帝这样说:「比库!如果你不嫌麻烦,我们将在工作坊住一夜。」「贤友!陶师工作坊宽敞。具寿请随意住。」
Atha kho bhagavā kumbhakārāvesanaṃ pavisitvā ekamantaṃ tiṇasanthārakaṃ paññāpetvā nisīdi pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāya parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā. Atha kho bhagavā bahudeva rattiṃ nisajjāya vītināmesi. Āyasmāpi kho pukkusāti bahudeva rattiṃ nisajjāya vītināmesi.
于是世尊进入陶师工作坊,在一旁铺设草座后,结跏趺坐,保持身体正直,现起面前之念而坐。于是世尊以坐姿度过大部分夜晚。具寿普库沙帝也以坐姿度过大部分夜晚。
Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi – ‘‘pāsādikaṃ kho ayaṃ kulaputto iriyati. Yaṃnūnāhaṃ puccheyya’’nti. Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṃ pukkusātiṃ etadavoca – ‘‘kaṃsi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, uddissa pabbajito? Ko vā te satthā? Kassa vā tvaṃ dhammaṃ rocesī’’ti? ‘‘Atthāvuso, samaṇo gotamo sakyaputto sakyakulā pabbajito. Taṃ kho pana bhagavantaṃ gotamaṃ evaṃ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato – ‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno sugato lokavidū anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānaṃ buddho bhagavā’ti . Tāhaṃ bhagavantaṃ uddissa pabbajito. So ca me bhagavā satthā. Tassa cāhaṃ bhagavato dhammaṃ rocemī’’ti. ‘‘Kahaṃ pana, bhikkhu, etarahi so bhagavā viharati arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ti. ‘‘Atthāvuso, uttaresu janapadesu sāvatthi nāma nagaraṃ. Tattha so bhagavā etarahi viharati arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ti. ‘‘Diṭṭhapubbo pana te, bhikkhu, so bhagavā; disvā ca pana jāneyyāsī’’ti? ‘‘Na kho me, āvuso, diṭṭhapubbo so bhagavā; disvā cāhaṃ na jāneyya’’nti.
于是世尊这样想:「这位族姓子威仪令人欢喜。我何不问他呢?」于是世尊对具寿普库沙帝这样说:「比库!你为了谁而出家?谁是你的导师?你欢喜谁的法?」「贤友!有沙门果德玛,萨咖之子,从萨咖族出家。关于那位世尊果德玛,这样的善名声已传扬:『如此,彼世尊是阿拉汉、正等正觉者、明行具足者、善逝、世间解、无上调御丈夫者、天人师、佛陀、世尊。』我为了那位世尊而出家。那位世尊是我的导师。我欢喜那位世尊的法。」「比库!那位世尊、阿拉汉、正等正觉者现在住在哪里?」「贤友!在北方诸国有一座名叫沙瓦提的城市。那位世尊、阿拉汉、正等正觉者现在住在那里。」「比库!你以前见过那位世尊吗?见到后你能认出吗?」「贤友!我以前没有见过那位世尊;见到后我也认不出。」
Atha kho bhagavato etadahosi – ‘‘mamañca khvāyaṃ kulaputto uddissa pabbajito. Yaṃnūnassāhaṃ dhammaṃ deseyya’’nti. Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṃ pukkusātiṃ āmantesi – ‘‘dhammaṃ te, bhikkhu, desessāmi. Taṃ suṇāhi, sādhukaṃ manasi karohi; bhāsissāmī’’ti. ‘‘Evamāvuso’’ti kho āyasmā pukkusāti bhagavato paccassosi. Bhagavā etadavoca –
于是世尊这样想:「这位族姓子确实是为了我而出家。我何不为他说法呢?」于是世尊称呼具寿普库沙帝:「比库!我将为你说法。你要听!要善加作意!我要说了。」「是的,贤友!」具寿普库沙帝回答世尊。世尊这样说:
§343
‘‘‘Chadhāturo ayaṃ, bhikkhu, puriso chaphassāyatano aṭṭhārasamanopavicāro caturādhiṭṭhāno; yattha ṭhitaṃ maññassavā nappavattanti, maññassave kho pana nappavattamāne muni santoti vuccati. Paññaṃ nappamajjeyya, saccamanurakkheyya, cāgamanubrūheyya, santimeva so sikkheyyā’ti – ayamuddeso dhātuvibhaṅgassa .
「『比库!此人是六界者、六触处者、十八意行者、四住立处者;对于住立于此者,想的潜流不流转,当想的潜流不流转时,他被称为牟尼、寂静者。不应放逸慧,应守护真谛,应增长舍,应学习寂静。』这是分别论论的总说。」
§344
‘‘‘Chadhāturo ayaṃ, bhikkhu, puriso’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? (Chayimā, bhikkhu, dhātuyo) – pathavīdhātu, āpodhātu, tejodhātu, vāyodhātu, ākāsadhātu, viññāṇadhātu. ‘Chadhāturo ayaṃ, bhikkhu, puriso’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「比库,此人是六界者」——如此已说。缘于什么而说呢?(比库,这六界是)——地界、水界、火界、风界、空界、识界。「比库,此人是六界者」——如此,凡如是所说,缘于此而说。
§345
‘‘‘Chaphassāyatano ayaṃ, bhikkhu, puriso’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? Cakkhusamphassāyatanaṃ, sotasamphassāyatanaṃ, ghānasamphassāyatanaṃ, jivhāsamphassāyatanaṃ, kāyasamphassāyatanaṃ, manosamphassāyatanaṃ. ‘Chaphassāyatano ayaṃ, bhikkhu, puriso’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「比库,此人是六触处者」——如此已说。缘于什么而说呢?眼触处、耳触处、鼻触处、舌触处、身触处、意触处。「比库,此人是六触处者」——如此,凡如是所说,缘于此而说。
§346
‘‘‘Aṭṭhārasamanopavicāro ayaṃ, bhikkhu, puriso’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā somanassaṭṭhānīyaṃ rūpaṃ upavicarati, domanassaṭṭhānīyaṃ rūpaṃ upavicarati, upekkhāṭṭhānīyaṃ rūpaṃ upavicarati; sotena saddaṃ sutvā…pe… ghānena gandhaṃ ghāyitvā… jivhāya rasaṃ sāyitvā… kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṃ phusitvā… manasā dhammaṃ viññāya somanassaṭṭhānīyaṃ dhammaṃ upavicarati, domanassaṭṭhānīyaṃ dhammaṃ upavicarati , upekkhāṭṭhānīyaṃ dhammaṃ upavicarati – iti cha somanassupavicārā, cha domanassupavicārā, cha upekkhupavicārā. ‘Aṭṭhārasamanopavicāro ayaṃ, bhikkhu, puriso’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「比库,此人是十八意行者」——如此已说。缘于什么而说呢?以眼见色后,寻求喜之处的色,寻求忧之处的色,寻求舍之处的色;以耳闻声后……以鼻嗅香后……以舌尝味后……以身触所触后……以意识法后,寻求喜之处的法,寻求忧之处的法,寻求舍之处的法——如此,六喜寻求、六忧寻求、六舍寻求。「比库,此人是十八意行者」——如此,凡如是所说,缘于此而说。
§347
‘‘‘Caturādhiṭṭhāno ayaṃ, bhikkhu, puriso’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? Paññādhiṭṭhāno, saccādhiṭṭhāno, cāgādhiṭṭhāno, upasamādhiṭṭhāno. ‘Caturādhiṭṭhāno ayaṃ, bhikkhu, puriso’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「比库,此人是四住处者」——如此已说。缘于什么而说呢?慧住处、谛住处、舍住处、寂止住处。「比库,此人是四住处者」——如此,凡如是所说,缘于此而说。
§348
‘‘‘Paññaṃ nappamajjeyya, saccamanurakkheyya, cāgamanubrūheyya, santimeva so sikkheyyā’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? Kathañca, bhikkhu, paññaṃ nappamajjati? Chayimā, bhikkhu, dhātuyo – pathavīdhātu, āpodhātu, tejodhātu, vāyodhātu, ākāsadhātu, viññāṇadhātu.
「不应放逸慧,应守护谛,应增长舍,他应学寂静」——如此已说。缘于什么而说呢?比库,如何不放逸慧呢?比库,这六界是——地界、水界、火界、风界、空界、识界。
§349
‘‘Katamā ca, bhikkhu, pathavīdhātu? Pathavīdhātu siyā ajjhattikā siyā bāhirā. Katamā ca, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu? Yaṃ ajjhattaṃ paccattaṃ kakkhaḷaṃ kharigataṃ upādinnaṃ , seyyathidaṃ – kesā lomā nakhā dantā taco maṃsaṃ nhāru aṭṭhi aṭṭhimiñjaṃ vakkaṃ hadayaṃ yakanaṃ kilomakaṃ pihakaṃ papphāsaṃ antaṃ antaguṇaṃ udariyaṃ karīsaṃ, yaṃ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṃ paccattaṃ kakkhaḷaṃ kharigataṃ upādinnaṃ – ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu yā ca bāhirā pathavīdhātu pathavīdhāturevesā . ‘Taṃ netaṃ mama nesohamasmi na meso attā’ti – evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya disvā pathavīdhātuyā nibbindati, pathavīdhātuyā cittaṃ virājeti.
比库,什么是地界呢?地界可能是内的,可能是外的。比库,什么是内地界呢?凡内的、自身的、坚的、固体性的、所执取的,即:发、毛、爪、齿、皮、肉、筋、骨、骨髓、肾、心、肝、肋膜、脾、肺、肠、肠间膜、胃中物、粪,或者其他任何内的、自身的、坚的、固体性的、所执取的——比库,这称为内地界。凡内地界与外地界,这只是地界。应以正慧如实见此:「这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的我。」以正慧如实见此后,他厌离地界,使心从地界离染。
§350
‘‘Katamā ca, bhikkhu, āpodhātu? Āpodhātu siyā ajjhattikā siyā bāhirā. Katamā ca, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā āpodhātu? Yaṃ ajjhattaṃ paccattaṃ āpo āpogataṃ upādinnaṃ seyyathidaṃ – pittaṃ semhaṃ pubbo lohitaṃ sedo medo assu vasā kheḷo siṅghāṇikā lasikā muttaṃ, yaṃ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṃ paccattaṃ āpo āpogataṃ upādinnaṃ – ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā āpodhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā āpodhātu yā ca bāhirā āpodhātu āpodhāturevesā. ‘Taṃ netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti – evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya disvā āpodhātuyā nibbindati, āpodhātuyā cittaṃ virājeti.
比库,什么是水界呢?水界可能是内的,可能是外的。比库,什么是内水界呢?凡内的、自身的、水、水性的、所执取的,即:胆汁、痰、脓、血、汗、脂肪、泪、膏、唾、鼻涕、关节滑液、尿,或者其他任何内的、自身的、水、水性的、所执取的——比库,这称为内水界。凡内水界与外水界,这只是水界。应以正慧如实见此:「这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的我。」以正慧如实见此后,他厌离水界,使心从水界离染。
§351
‘‘Katamā ca, bhikkhu, tejodhātu? Tejodhātu siyā ajjhattikā siyā bāhirā. Katamā ca, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā tejodhātu? Yaṃ ajjhattaṃ paccattaṃ tejo tejogataṃ upādinnaṃ, seyyathidaṃ – yena ca santappati, yena ca jīrīyati, yena ca pariḍayhati, yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṃ sammā pariṇāmaṃ gacchati, yaṃ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṃ paccattaṃ tejo tejogataṃ upādinnaṃ – ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā tejodhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā tejodhātu yā ca bāhirā tejodhātu tejodhāturevesā. ‘Taṃ netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti – evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya disvā tejodhātuyā nibbindati, tejodhātuyā cittaṃ virājeti.
比库,什么是火界呢?火界可能是内的,可能是外的。比库,什么是内火界呢?凡内的、自身的、火、火性的、所执取的,即:以此而温暖,以此而衰老,以此而燃烧,以此使所食、所饮、所嚼、所尝的完全消化,或者其他任何内的、自身的、火、火性的、所执取的——比库,这称为内火界。凡内火界与外火界,这只是火界。应以正慧如实见此:「这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的我。」以正慧如实见此后,他厌离火界,使心从火界离染。
§352
‘‘Katamā ca, bhikkhu, vāyodhātu? Vāyodhātu siyā ajjhattikā siyā bāhirā. Katamā ca, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā vāyodhātu? Yaṃ ajjhattaṃ paccattaṃ vāyo vāyogataṃ upādinnaṃ, seyyathidaṃ – uddhaṅgamā vātā adhogamā vātā kucchisayā vātā koṭṭhāsayā vātā aṅgamaṅgānusārino vātā assāso passāso iti, yaṃ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṃ paccattaṃ vāyo vāyogataṃ upādinnaṃ – ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā vāyodhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā vāyodhātu yā ca bāhirā vāyodhātu vāyodhāturevesā. ‘Taṃ netaṃ mama , nesohamasmi , na meso attā’ti – evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya disvā vāyodhātuyā nibbindati, vāyodhātuyā cittaṃ virājeti.
「比库,什么是风界?风界可能是内的,可能是外的。比库,什么是内风界?凡内的、自身的、风、风性的、所执取的,即:上行风、下行风、腹中风、肠中风、流遍肢体的风、入息、出息,或者任何其他内的、自身的、风、风性的、所执取的——比库,这称为内风界。凡内风界与外风界,这只是风界。应以正慧如实见此:『这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的我。』以正慧如实见此已,他厌离风界,使心从风界离染。」
§353
‘‘Katamā ca, bhikkhu, ākāsadhātu? Ākāsadhātu siyā ajjhattikā siyā bāhirā. Katamā ca, bhikkhu, ajjhattikā ākāsadhātu ? Yaṃ ajjhattaṃ paccattaṃ ākāsaṃ ākāsagataṃ upādinnaṃ, seyyathidaṃ – kaṇṇacchiddaṃ nāsacchiddaṃ mukhadvāraṃ yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṃ ajjhoharati, yattha ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṃ santiṭṭhati, yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṃ adhobhāgaṃ nikkhamati, yaṃ vā panaññampi kiñci ajjhattaṃ paccattaṃ ākāsaṃ ākāsagataṃ aghaṃ aghagataṃ vivaraṃ vivaragataṃ asamphuṭṭhaṃ maṃsalohitehi upādinnaṃ – ayaṃ vuccati bhikkhu ajjhattikā ākāsadhātu. Yā ceva kho pana ajjhattikā ākāsadhātu yā ca bāhirā ākāsadhātu ākāsadhāturevesā. ‘Taṃ netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’ti – evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya disvā ākāsadhātuyā nibbindati, ākāsadhātuyā cittaṃ virājeti.
「比库,什么是空界?空界可能是内的,可能是外的。比库,什么是内空界?凡内的、自身的、空、空性的、所执取的,即:耳孔、鼻孔、口门、以及由此吞下所食所饮所嚼所尝之物,以及所食所饮所嚼所尝之物停留之处,以及所食所饮所嚼所尝之物从下部排出之处,或者任何其他内的、自身的、空、空性的、孔、孔性的、隙、隙性的、未被肉血所触的、所执取的——比库,这称为内空界。凡内空界与外空界,这只是空界。应以正慧如实见此:『这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的我。』以正慧如实见此已,他厌离空界,使心从空界离染。」
§354
‘‘Athāparaṃ viññāṇaṃyeva avasissati parisuddhaṃ pariyodātaṃ. Tena ca viññāṇena kiṃ vijānāti? ‘Sukha’ntipi vijānāti, ‘dukkha’ntipi vijānāti, ‘adukkhamasukha’ntipi vijānāti. Sukhavedaniyaṃ, bhikkhu, phassaṃ paṭicca uppajjati sukhā vedanā. So sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti. ‘Tasseva sukhavedaniyassa phassassa nirodhā yaṃ tajjaṃ vedayitaṃ sukhavedaniyaṃ phassaṃ paṭicca uppannā sukhā vedanā sā nirujjhati, sā vūpasammatī’ti pajānāti.
「然后,只剩下清净、皎洁的识。以那识了知什么呢?了知『乐』,了知『苦』,了知『不苦不乐』。比库,缘于乐受触而生起乐受。当感受乐受时,他了知『我感受乐受』。他了知『由于那乐受触的灭,缘于乐受触而生起的那相应所感受的乐受灭、止息。』」
§355
‘‘Dukkhavedaniyaṃ, bhikkhu, phassaṃ paṭicca uppajjati dukkhā vedanā. So dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti. ‘Tasseva dukkhavedaniyassa phassassa nirodhā yaṃ tajjaṃ vedayitaṃ dukkhavedaniyaṃ phassaṃ paṭicca uppannā dukkhā vedanā sā nirujjhati, sā vūpasammatī’ti pajānāti.
「比库,缘于苦受触而生起苦受。当感受苦受时,他了知『我感受苦受』。他了知『由于那苦受触的灭,缘于苦受触而生起的那相应所感受的苦受灭、止息。』」
§356
‘‘Adukkhamasukhavedaniyaṃ, bhikkhu, phassaṃ paṭicca uppajjati adukkhamasukhā vedanā. So adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti. ‘Tasseva adukkhamasukhavedaniyassa phassassa nirodhā yaṃ tajjaṃ vedayitaṃ adukkhamasukhavedaniyaṃ phassaṃ paṭicca uppannā adukkhamasukhā vedanā sā nirujjhati, sā vūpasammatī’ti pajānāti.
「比库,缘于不苦不乐受触而生起不苦不乐受。当感受不苦不乐受时,他了知『我感受不苦不乐受』。他了知『由于那不苦不乐受触的灭,缘于不苦不乐受触而生起的那相应所感受的不苦不乐受灭、止息。』」
§357
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhu, dvinnaṃ kaṭṭhānaṃ saṅghaṭṭā samodhānā usmā jāyati, tejo abhinibbattati, tesaṃyeva dvinnaṃ kaṭṭhānaṃ nānābhāvā vikkhepā yā tajjā usmā sā nirujjhati, sā vūpasammati; evameva kho, bhikkhu, sukhavedaniyaṃ phassaṃ paṭicca uppajjati sukhā vedanā. So sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti. ‘Tasseva sukhavedaniyassa phassassa nirodhā yaṃ tajjaṃ vedayitaṃ sukhavedaniyaṃ phassaṃ paṭicca uppannā sukhā vedanā sā nirujjhati, sā vūpasammatī’ti pajānāti.
「比库,譬如由于两根木的摩擦、碰撞而生热,产生火,由于那两根木的分离、散开,那相应的热灭、止息;同样地,比库,缘于乐受触而生起乐受。当感受乐受时,他了知『我感受乐受』。他了知『由于那乐受触的灭,缘于乐受触而生起的那相应所感受的乐受灭、止息。』」
§358
‘‘Dukkhavedaniyaṃ, bhikkhu, phassaṃ paṭicca uppajjati dukkhā vedanā. So dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti. ‘Tasseva dukkhavedaniyassa phassassa nirodhā yaṃ tajjaṃ vedayitaṃ dukkhavedaniyaṃ phassaṃ paṭicca uppannā dukkhā vedanā sā nirujjhati, sā vūpasammatī’ti pajānāti.
「比库,缘于苦受触而生起苦受。当感受苦受时,他了知『我感受苦受』。他了知『由于那苦受触的灭,缘于苦受触而生起的那相应所感受的苦受灭、止息。』」
§359
‘‘Adukkhamasukhavedaniyaṃ , bhikkhu, phassaṃ paṭicca uppajjati adukkhamasukhā vedanā. So adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti. ‘Tasseva adukkhamasukhavedaniyassa phassassa nirodhā yaṃ tajjaṃ vedayitaṃ adukkhamasukhavedaniyaṃ phassaṃ paṭicca uppannā adukkhamasukhā vedanā sā nirujjhati, sā vūpasammatī’ti pajānāti.
「比库,缘于不苦不乐受触而生起不苦不乐受。当感受不苦不乐受时,他了知『我感受不苦不乐受』。他了知『由于那不苦不乐受触的灭,缘于不苦不乐受触而生起的那相应所感受的不苦不乐受灭、止息。』」
§360
‘‘Athāparaṃ upekkhāyeva avasissati parisuddhā pariyodātā mudu ca kammaññā ca pabhassarā ca. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhu, dakkho suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā ukkaṃ bandheyya, ukkaṃ bandhitvā ukkāmukhaṃ ālimpeyya, ukkāmukhaṃ ālimpetvā saṇḍāsena jātarūpaṃ gahetvā ukkāmukhe pakkhipeyya, tamenaṃ kālena kālaṃ abhidhameyya, kālena kālaṃ udakena paripphoseyya, kālena kālaṃ ajjhupekkheyya, taṃ hoti jātarūpaṃ sudhantaṃ niddhantaṃ nīhaṭaṃ ninnītakasāvaṃ mudu ca kammaññañca pabhassarañca, yassā yassā ca piḷandhanavikatiyā ākaṅkhati – yadi paṭṭikāya yadi kuṇḍalāya yadi gīveyyakāya yadi suvaṇṇamālāya tañcassa atthaṃ anubhoti; evameva kho, bhikkhu, athāparaṃ upekkhāyeva avasissati parisuddhā pariyodātā mudu ca kammaññā ca pabhassarā ca.
「诸比库,其次,只剩下清净、皎洁、柔软、适业、光辉的舍。诸比库,譬如善巧的金匠或金匠的弟子建造熔炉,建造熔炉后涂抹炉口,涂抹炉口后用钳子夹取金块投入炉口,时时吹风,时时洒水,时时旁观,那金块被善炼、精炼、熔炼、去除杂质,柔软、适业、光辉,无论他想要做成何种装饰品——或手镯、或耳环、或项链、或金鬘,都能达成其目的;同样地,诸比库,其次,只剩下清净、皎洁、柔软、适业、光辉的舍。」
§361
‘‘So evaṃ pajānāti – ‘imañce ahaṃ upekkhaṃ evaṃ parisuddhaṃ evaṃ pariyodātaṃ ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ upasaṃhareyyaṃ, tadanudhammañca cittaṃ bhāveyyaṃ. Evaṃ me ayaṃ upekkhā taṃnissitā tadupādānā ciraṃ dīghamaddhānaṃ tiṭṭheyya. Imañce ahaṃ upekkhaṃ evaṃ parisuddhaṃ evaṃ pariyodātaṃ viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ upasaṃhareyyaṃ, tadanudhammañca cittaṃ bhāveyyaṃ. Evaṃ me ayaṃ upekkhā taṃnissitā tadupādānā ciraṃ dīghamaddhānaṃ tiṭṭheyya. Imañce ahaṃ upekkhaṃ evaṃ parisuddhaṃ evaṃ pariyodātaṃ ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ upasaṃhareyyaṃ, tadanudhammañca cittaṃ bhāveyyaṃ. Evaṃ me ayaṃ upekkhā taṃnissitā tadupādānā ciraṃ dīghamaddhānaṃ tiṭṭheyya. Imañce ahaṃ upekkhaṃ evaṃ parisuddhaṃ evaṃ pariyodātaṃ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ upasaṃhareyyaṃ, tadanudhammañca cittaṃ bhāveyyaṃ. Evaṃ me ayaṃ upekkhā taṃnissitā tadupādānā ciraṃ dīghamaddhānaṃ tiṭṭheyyā’’’ti.
「他如此了知:『若我将此如是清净、如是皎洁的舍导向空无边处,并修习与之相应的心,如此,此舍依止于彼、执取于彼,能长久、长时间住立。若我将此如是清净、如是皎洁的舍导向识无边处,并修习与之相应的心,如此,此舍依止于彼、执取于彼,能长久、长时间住立。若我将此如是清净、如是皎洁的舍导向无所有处,并修习与之相应的心,如此,此舍依止于彼、执取于彼,能长久、长时间住立。若我将此如是清净、如是皎洁的舍导向非想非非想处,并修习与之相应的心,如此,此舍依止于彼、执取于彼,能长久、长时间住立。』」
§362
‘‘So evaṃ pajānāti – ‘imañce ahaṃ upekkhaṃ evaṃ parisuddhaṃ evaṃ pariyodātaṃ ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ upasaṃhareyyaṃ, tadanudhammañca cittaṃ bhāveyyaṃ; saṅkhatametaṃ. Imañce ahaṃ upekkhaṃ evaṃ parisuddhaṃ evaṃ pariyodātaṃ viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ upasaṃhareyyaṃ, tadanudhammañca cittaṃ bhāveyyaṃ; saṅkhatametaṃ. Imañce ahaṃ upekkhaṃ evaṃ parisuddhaṃ evaṃ pariyodātaṃ ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ upasaṃhareyyaṃ, tadanudhammañca cittaṃ bhāveyyaṃ; saṅkhatametaṃ. Imañce ahaṃ upekkhaṃ evaṃ parisuddhaṃ evaṃ pariyodātaṃ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ upasaṃhareyyaṃ, tadanudhammañca cittaṃ bhāveyyaṃ; saṅkhatameta’’’nti.
「他如此了知:『若我将此如是清净、如是皎洁的舍导向空无边处,并修习与之相应的心;此是有为的。若我将此如是清净、如是皎洁的舍导向识无边处,并修习与之相应的心;此是有为的。若我将此如是清净、如是皎洁的舍导向无所有处,并修习与之相应的心;此是有为的。若我将此如是清净、如是皎洁的舍导向非想非非想处,并修习与之相应的心;此是有为的。』」
‘‘So neva taṃ abhisaṅkharoti, na abhisañcetayati bhavāya vā vibhavāya vā. So anabhisaṅkharonto anabhisañcetayanto bhavāya vā vibhavāya vā na kiñci loke upādiyati, anupādiyaṃ na paritassati, aparitassaṃ paccattaṃyeva parinibbāyati. ‘Khīṇā jāti, vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, kataṃ karaṇīyaṃ, nāparaṃ itthattāyā’ti pajānāti.
「他既不造作、不思惟有或无有。他不造作、不思惟有或无有,不执取世间的任何事物,不执取故不战栗,不战栗故自己般涅槃。他了知:『生已尽,梵行已立,应作已作,不再有此存在。』」
§363
‘‘So sukhañce vedanaṃ vedeti, ‘sā aniccā’ti pajānāti, ‘anajjhositā’ti pajānāti, ‘anabhinanditā’ti pajānāti. Dukkhañce vedanaṃ vedeti , ‘sā aniccā’ti pajānāti,
「若他感受乐受,他了知『它是无常的』,他了知『不被耽著的』,他了知『不被欢喜的』。若他感受苦受,他了知『它是无常的』,」
§364
‘‘So sukhañce vedanaṃ vedeti, visaṃyutto naṃ vedeti; dukkhañce vedanaṃ vedeti, visaṃyutto naṃ vedeti; adukkhamasukhañce vedanaṃ vedeti, visaṃyutto naṃ vedeti. So kāyapariyantikaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘kāyapariyantikaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti, jīvitapariyantikaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘jīvitapariyantikaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti, ‘kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā uddhaṃ jīvitapariyādānā idheva sabbavedayitāni anabhinanditāni sītībhavissantī’ti pajānāti.
「若他感受乐受,他离系地感受它;若他感受苦受,他离系地感受它;若他感受不苦不乐受,他离系地感受它。当他感受身边际的受时,他了知『我感受身边际的受』;当他感受命边际的受时,他了知『我感受命边际的受』;他了知『身坏命终后,寿命耗尽,就在此处,一切所感受的,不被欢喜的,将会清凉。』」
§365
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhu, telañca paṭicca vaṭṭiñca paṭicca telappadīpo jhāyati; tasseva telassa ca vaṭṭiyā ca pariyādānā aññassa ca anupahārā anāhāro nibbāyati; evameva kho, bhikkhu, kāyapariyantikaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘kāyapariyantikaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti, jīvitapariyantikaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘jīvitapariyantikaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti, ‘kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā uddhaṃ jīvitapariyādānā idheva sabbavedayitāni anabhinanditāni sītībhavissantī’ti pajānāti. Tasmā evaṃ samannāgato bhikkhu iminā paramena paññādhiṭṭhānena samannāgato hoti. Esā hi, bhikkhu, paramā ariyā paññā yadidaṃ – sabbadukkhakkhaye ñāṇaṃ.
「诸比库,譬如缘于油、缘于灯芯,油灯燃烧;由于那油和灯芯的耗尽,又无其他供给,无燃料而熄灭;同样地,诸比库,当他感受身边际的受时,他了知『我感受身边际的受』;当他感受命边际的受时,他了知『我感受命边际的受』;他了知『身坏命终后,寿命耗尽,就在此处,一切所感受的,不被欢喜的,将会清凉。』因此,具足如是的比库具足此最上的慧住立。诸比库,此即最上的圣慧,即:关于一切苦尽的智。」
§366
‘‘Tassa sā vimutti sacce ṭhitā akuppā hoti. Tañhi, bhikkhu, musā yaṃ mosadhammaṃ, taṃ saccaṃ yaṃ amosadhammaṃ nibbānaṃ. Tasmā evaṃ samannāgato bhikkhu iminā paramena saccādhiṭṭhānena samannāgato hoti. Etañhi, bhikkhu, paramaṃ ariyasaccaṃ yadidaṃ – amosadhammaṃ nibbānaṃ.
「他的那解脱住立于真实,不动摇。诸比库,凡是虚妄法者是虚妄,凡是不虚妄法者——涅槃——是真实。因此,具足如是的比库具足此最上的真实住立。诸比库,此即最上的圣谛,即:不虚妄法——涅槃。」
§367
‘‘Tasseva kho pana pubbe aviddasuno upadhī honti samattā samādinnā. Tyāssa pahīnā honti ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṃkatā āyatiṃ anuppādadhammā. Tasmā evaṃ samannāgato bhikkhu iminā paramena cāgādhiṭṭhānena samannāgato hoti. Eso hi, bhikkhu, paramo ariyo cāgo yadidaṃ – sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggo.
「然而,对于他,以前未了知时,诸依存在,已完成,已执取。那些已被他舍断,根已被切断,如多罗树头,成为非有,于未来不再生起之法。因此,具备如此之比库,具备此最上的舍弃确立。比库,这确实是最上的圣舍弃,即:一切依的舍离。」
§368
‘‘Tasseva kho pana pubbe aviddasuno abhijjhā hoti chando sārāgo. Svāssa pahīno hoti ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṃkato āyatiṃ anuppādadhammo. Tasseva kho pana pubbe aviddasuno āghāto hoti byāpādo sampadoso. Svāssa pahīno hoti ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṃkato āyatiṃ anuppādadhammo. Tasseva kho pana pubbe aviddasuno avijjā hoti sammoho. Svāssa pahīno hoti ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṃkato āyatiṃ anuppādadhammo. Tasmā evaṃ samannāgato bhikkhu iminā paramena upasamādhiṭṭhānena samannāgato hoti. Eso hi, bhikkhu, paramo ariyo upasamo yadidaṃ – rāgadosamohānaṃ upasamo. ‘Paññaṃ nappamajjeyya, saccamanurakkheyya, cāgamanubrūheyya, santimeva so sikkheyyā’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
「然而,对于他,以前未了知时,有贪求,有欲,有染。那已被他舍断,根已被切断,如多罗树头,成为非有,于未来不再生起之法。然而,对于他,以前未了知时,有恼害,有嗔恨,有恶意。那已被他舍断,根已被切断,如多罗树头,成为非有,于未来不再生起之法。然而,对于他,以前未了知时,有无明,有痴。那已被他舍断,根已被切断,如多罗树头,成为非有,于未来不再生起之法。因此,具备如此之比库,具备此最上的寂止确立。比库,这确实是最上的圣寂止,即:贪、嗔、痴的寂止。『不应放逸慧,应守护真谛,应增长舍弃,应学习寂静』——如此,凡所说的,缘于此而说。」
§369
‘‘‘Yattha ṭhitaṃ maññassavā nappavattanti, maññassave kho pana nappavattamāne muni santoti vuccatī’ti – iti kho panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiñcetaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ? ‘Asmī’ti, bhikkhu, maññitametaṃ, ‘ayamahamasmī’ti maññitametaṃ, ‘bhavissa’nti maññitametaṃ, ‘na bhavissa’nti maññitametaṃ, ‘rūpī bhavissa’nti maññitametaṃ, ‘arūpī bhavissa’nti maññitametaṃ, ‘saññī bhavissa’nti maññitametaṃ, ‘asaññī bhavissa’nti maññitametaṃ, ‘nevasaññīnāsaññī bhavissa’nti maññitametaṃ. Maññitaṃ, bhikkhu, rogo maññitaṃ gaṇḍo maññitaṃ sallaṃ. Sabbamaññitānaṃ tveva, bhikkhu, samatikkamā muni santoti vuccati. Muni kho pana, bhikkhu, santo na jāyati, na jīyati, na mīyati, na kuppati, na piheti. Tañhissa, bhikkhu, natthi yena jāyetha, ajāyamāno kiṃ jīyissati, ajīyamāno kiṃ mīyissati, amīyamāno kiṃ kuppissati, akuppamāno kissa pihessati? ‘Yattha ṭhitaṃ maññassavā nappavattanti, maññassave kho pana nappavattamāne muni santoti vuccatī’ti – iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ. Imaṃ kho me tvaṃ, bhikkhu, saṃkhittena chadhātuvibhaṅgaṃ dhārehī’’ti.
「『于住立处,慢随流不流转,而慢随流不流转时,牟尼被称为寂静』——如此,这确实已被说。缘于什么而说呢?比库,『我是』,这是慢想;『我是这个』,这是慢想;『我将有』,这是慢想;『我将不有』,这是慢想;『我将有色』,这是慢想;『我将无色』,这是慢想;『我将有想』,这是慢想;『我将无想』,这是慢想;『我将非想非非想』,这是慢想。比库,慢想是病,慢想是痈,慢想是箭。比库,确实由于超越一切慢想,牟尼被称为寂静。比库,寂静的牟尼不生,不老,不死,不动摇,不希求。比库,他没有那个由此而生的,不生者将如何老?不老者将如何死?不死者将如何动摇?不动摇者将希求什么?『于住立处,慢随流不流转,而慢随流不流转时,牟尼被称为寂静』——如此,凡所说的,缘于此而说。比库,你应忆持我这简略的六分别论论。」
§370
Atha kho āyasmā pukkusāti – ‘‘satthā kira me anuppatto, sugato kira me anuppatto sammāsambuddho kira me anuppatto’’ti uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṃsaṃ cīvaraṃ katvā bhagavato pādesu sirasā nipatitvā bhagavantaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘accayo maṃ, bhante, accagamā yathābālaṃ yathāmūḷhaṃ yathāakusalaṃ, yohaṃ bhagavantaṃ āvusovādena samudācaritabbaṃ amaññissaṃ. Tassa me, bhante, bhagavā accayaṃ accayato paṭiggaṇhātu āyatiṃ saṃvarāyā’’ti. ‘‘Taggha tvaṃ, bhikkhu, accayo accagamā yathābālaṃ yathāmūḷhaṃ yathāakusalaṃ , yaṃ maṃ tvaṃ āvusovādena samudācaritabbaṃ amaññittha. Yato ca kho tvaṃ, bhikkhu, accayaṃ accayato disvā yathādhammaṃ paṭikarosi, taṃ te mayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāma. Vuddhihesā, bhikkhu, ariyassa vinaye yo accayaṃ accayato disvā yathādhammaṃ paṭikaroti, āyatiṃ saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’ti. ‘‘Labheyyāhaṃ, bhante, bhagavato santike upasampada’’nti. ‘‘Paripuṇṇaṃ pana te, bhikkhu, pattacīvara’’nti? ‘‘Na kho me, bhante, paripuṇṇaṃ pattacīvara’’nti. ‘‘Na kho, bhikkhu, tathāgatā aparipuṇṇapattacīvaraṃ upasampādentī’’ti.
那时,具寿普库沙帝——「我的导师已到达,我的善逝已到达,我的正等正觉者已到达」——从座而起,将衣偏袒一肩,以头礼世尊足,对世尊如此说:「尊者,过失胜过了我,如愚者,如痴者,如不善巧者,我认为应以『朋友』之称呼对世尊。尊者,愿世尊接受我的过失为过失,为了未来的防护。」「比库,确实过失胜过了你,如愚者,如痴者,如不善巧者,你认为应以『朋友』之称呼对我。比库,然而,由于你见过失为过失,如法改正,我们接受你的。比库,这在圣者之律中是增长,凡见过失为过失,如法改正,于未来达到防护者。」「尊者,我能在世尊面前得受达上吗?」「比库,然而,你的钵与衣具足了吗?」「尊者,我的钵与衣不具足。」「比库,如来不为钵与衣不具足者授达上。」
Atha kho āyasmā pukkusāti bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinanditvā anumoditvā uṭṭhāyāsanā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pattacīvarapariyesanaṃ pakkāmi. Atha kho āyasmantaṃ pukkusātiṃ pattacīvarapariyesanaṃ carantaṃ vibbhantā gāvī jīvitā voropesi. Atha kho sambahulā bhikkhū yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsu; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Ekamantaṃ nisinnā kho te bhikkhū bhagavantaṃ etadavocuṃ – ‘‘yo so, bhante, pukkusāti nāma kulaputto bhagavatā saṃkhittena ovādena ovadito so kālaṅkato. Tassa kā gati, ko abhisamparāyo’’ti? ‘‘Paṇḍito, bhikkhave, pukkusāti kulaputto paccapādi dhammassānudhammaṃ, na ca maṃ dhammādhikaraṇaṃ vihesesi . Pukkusāti, bhikkhave, kulaputto pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā opapātiko tattha parinibbāyī anāvattidhammo tasmā lokā’’ti.
那时,具寿普库沙帝欢喜、随喜世尊所说,从座而起,礼敬世尊,作右绕后,出发寻求钵与衣。那时,具寿普库沙帝在寻求钵与衣时,被离群的母牛夺去了生命。那时,众多比库去到世尊处;到达后,礼敬世尊,坐于一边。坐于一边的那些比库对世尊如此说:「尊者,那位名叫普库沙帝的善家子,被世尊以简略的教诫所教诫,他已命终。他的趣向如何?来世如何?」「诸比库,善家子普库沙帝是贤者,随法而行法,不以法之因而恼害我。诸比库,善家子普库沙帝,由于五下分结的灭尽,是化生者,在那里般涅槃,从那个世间不再来。」
Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti.
世尊说此。那些比库心满意足,欢喜世尊所说。
Dhātuvibhaṅgasuttaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ dasamaṃ. · 界分别经完,第十
11. Saccavibhaṅgasuttaṃ11. 谛分别经
§371
Evaṃ me sutaṃ – ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā bārāṇasiyaṃ viharati isipatane migadāye. Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti. ‘‘Bhadante’’ti te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṃ. Bhagavā etadavoca –
如是我闻——一时,世尊住在巴拉纳西仙人堕处鹿野苑。在那里,世尊称呼诸比库:「诸比库。」「尊者。」那些比库回答世尊。世尊如此说:
‘‘Tathāgatena, bhikkhave, arahatā sammāsambuddhena bārāṇasiyaṃ isipatane migadāye anuttaraṃ dhammacakkaṃ pavattitaṃ appaṭivattiyaṃ samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā kenaci vā lokasmiṃ, yadidaṃ – catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṃ. Katamesaṃ catunnaṃ? Dukkhassa ariyasaccassa ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṃ, dukkhasamudayassa ariyasaccassa ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṃ, dukkhanirodhassa ariyasaccassa ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya ariyasaccassa ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṃ. Tathāgatena, bhikkhave, arahatā sammāsambuddhena bārāṇasiyaṃ isipatane migadāye anuttaraṃ dhammacakkaṃ pavattitaṃ appaṭivattiyaṃ samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā kenaci vā lokasmiṃ , yadidaṃ – imesaṃ catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṃ.
「诸比库,如来、阿拉汉、正等正觉者在巴拉纳西仙人堕处鹿野苑转起无上法轮,不能被沙门、婆罗门、天人、魔、梵天或世间任何者转回,即:四圣谛的指示、教导、施设、建立、开显、分别论、阐明。哪四个?苦圣谛的指示、教导、施设、建立、开显、分别论、阐明,苦集圣谛的指示、教导、施设、建立、开显、分别论、阐明,苦灭圣谛的指示、教导、施设、建立、开显、分别论、阐明,导至苦灭之道圣谛的指示、教导、施设、建立、开显、分别论、阐明。诸比库,如来、阿拉汉、正等正觉者在巴拉纳西仙人堕处鹿野苑转起无上法轮,不能被沙门、婆罗门、天人、魔、梵天或世间任何者转回,即:这四圣谛的指示、教导、施设、建立、开显、分别论、阐明。」
‘‘Sevatha, bhikkhave, sāriputtamoggallāne; bhajatha, bhikkhave, sāriputtamoggallāne. Paṇḍitā bhikkhū anuggāhakā sabrahmacārīnaṃ. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, janetā , evaṃ sāriputto; seyyathāpi jātassa āpādetā, evaṃ moggallāno. Sāriputto, bhikkhave, sotāpattiphale vineti, moggallāno uttamatthe. Sāriputto, bhikkhave, pahoti cattāri ariyasaccāni vitthārena ācikkhituṃ desetuṃ paññāpetuṃ paṭṭhapetuṃ vivarituṃ vibhajituṃ uttānīkātu’’nti. Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṃ vatvāna sugato uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ pāvisi.
「诸比库,你们应亲近沙利子与摩嘎剌那;诸比库,你们应依止沙利子与摩嘎剌那。他们是贤智的比库,是梵行者的助益者。诸比库,譬如生母,沙利子亦如是;譬如已生者的养育者,摩嘎剌那亦如是。诸比库,沙利子训练于入流果,摩嘎剌那训练于最上义。诸比库,沙利子能够详细地教导、宣说、施设、建立、开显、分别论、阐明四圣谛。」世尊说此。善逝说此已,从座起而入精舍。
§372
Tatra kho āyasmā sāriputto acirapakkantassa bhagavato bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘āvuso, bhikkhave’’ti. ‘‘Āvuso’’ti kho te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa paccassosuṃ. Āyasmā sāriputto etadavoca –
于是,具寿沙利子在世尊离去不久,告诉诸比库——「贤友们,诸比库。」「贤友。」那些比库回答具寿沙利子。具寿沙利子说此——
‘‘Tathāgatena, āvuso, arahatā sammāsambuddhena bārāṇasiyaṃ isipatane migadāye anuttaraṃ dhammacakkaṃ pavattitaṃ appaṭivattiyaṃ samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā kenaci vā lokasmiṃ, yadidaṃ – catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṃ. Katamesaṃ catunnaṃ? Dukkhassa ariyasaccassa ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṃ, dukkhasamudayassa ariyasaccassa ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṃ, dukkhanirodhassa ariyasaccassa ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya ariyasaccassa ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṃ.
「贤友们,如来、阿拉汉、正等正觉者在巴拉纳西仙人堕处鹿野苑转起无上法轮,此法轮不能被沙门、婆罗门、天人、魔、梵天或世间任何者所转回,即:四圣谛的教导、宣说、施设、建立、开显、分别论、阐明。哪四者?苦圣谛的教导、宣说、施设、建立、开显、分别论、阐明,苦集圣谛的教导、宣说、施设、建立、开显、分别论、阐明,苦灭圣谛的教导、宣说、施设、建立、开显、分别论、阐明,导至苦灭之道圣谛的教导、宣说、施设、建立、开显、分别论、阐明。
§373
‘‘Katamañcāvuso, dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ? Jātipi dukkhā, jarāpi dukkhā, maraṇampi dukkhaṃ, sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsāpi dukkhā, yampicchaṃ na labhati tampi dukkhaṃ; saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā.
「贤友们,什么是苦圣谛?生是苦,老是苦,死是苦,愁、悲、苦、忧、恼是苦,所求不得也是苦;简而言之,五取蕴是苦。
‘‘Katamā cāvuso, jāti? Yā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jāti sañjāti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhānaṃ pātubhāvo āyatanānaṃ paṭilābho, ayaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘jāti’’’.
「贤友们,什么是生?凡彼彼有情于彼彼有情类中的生、出生、入胎、再生、诸蕴的显现、诸处的获得,贤友们,这称为『生』。
‘‘Katamā cāvuso, jarā? Yā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jarā jīraṇatā khaṇḍiccaṃ pāliccaṃ valittacatā āyuno saṃhāni indriyānaṃ paripāko, ayaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘jarā’’’.
「贤友们,什么是老?凡彼彼有情于彼彼有情类中的老、老朽、齿落、发白、皮皱、寿命的衰退、诸根的成熟,贤友们,这称为『老』。
‘‘Katamañcāvuso, maraṇaṃ? Yā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ tamhā tamhā sattanikāyā cuti cavanatā bhedo antaradhānaṃ maccu maraṇaṃ kālaṃkiriyā khandhānaṃ bhedo kaḷevarassa nikkhepo jīvitindriyassupacchedo, idaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘maraṇaṃ’’’.
「贤友们,什么是死?凡彼彼有情从彼彼有情类的死没、灭没、破坏、消失、命终、死亡、作时、诸蕴的破坏、身体的舍弃、命根的断绝,贤友们,这称为『死』。
‘‘Katamo cāvuso, soko? Yo kho, āvuso, aññataraññatarena byasanena samannāgatassa aññataraññatarena dukkhadhammena phuṭṭhassa soko socanā socitattaṃ antosoko antoparisoko, ayaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘soko’’’.
「贤友们,什么是愁?贤友们,凡遭遇某种不幸、被某种苦法所触者的愁、愁恼、愁恼性、内愁、内遍愁,贤友们,这称为『愁』。
‘‘Katamo cāvuso, paridevo? Yo kho, āvuso, aññataraññatarena byasanena samannāgatassa aññataraññatarena dukkhadhammena phuṭṭhassa ādevo paridevo ādevanā paridevanā ādevitattaṃ paridevitattaṃ, ayaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘paridevo’’’.
「诸友!什么是悲?诸友!凡具有某种不幸者、被某种苦法所触者的哀、悲、哀叹、悲叹、哀叹状态、悲叹状态,诸友!这被称为『悲』。」
‘‘Katamañcāvuso, dukkhaṃ? Yaṃ kho, āvuso, kāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ kāyikaṃ asātaṃ kāyasamphassajaṃ dukkhaṃ asātaṃ vedayitaṃ, idaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘dukkhaṃ’’’.
「诸友!什么是苦?诸友!凡身的苦、身的不悦、身触所生的苦的不悦感受,诸友!这被称为『苦』。」
‘‘Katamañcāvuso, domanassaṃ? Yaṃ kho, āvuso, cetasikaṃ dukkhaṃ cetasikaṃ asātaṃ manosamphassajaṃ dukkhaṃ asātaṃ vedayitaṃ, idaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘domanassaṃ’’’.
「诸友!什么是忧?诸友!凡心的苦、心的不悦、意触所生的苦的不悦感受,诸友!这被称为『忧』。」
‘‘Katamo cāvuso, upāyāso? Yo kho, āvuso, aññataraññatarena byasanena samannāgatassa aññataraññatarena dukkhadhammena phuṭṭhassa āyāso upāyāso āyāsitattaṃ upāyāsitattaṃ, ayaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘upāyāso’’’.
「诸友!什么是恼?诸友!凡具有某种不幸者、被某种苦法所触者的恼、绝望、恼状态、绝望状态,诸友!这被称为『恼』。」
‘‘Katamañcāvuso, yampicchaṃ na labhati tampi dukkhaṃ? Jātidhammānaṃ, āvuso, sattānaṃ evaṃ icchā uppajjati – ‘aho vata, mayaṃ na jātidhammā assāma; na ca, vata, no jāti āgaccheyyā’ti. Na kho panetaṃ icchāya pattabbaṃ. Idampi – ‘yampicchaṃ na labhati tampi dukkhaṃ’. Jarādhammānaṃ, āvuso, sattānaṃ…pe… byādhidhammānaṃ, āvuso, sattānaṃ… maraṇadhammānaṃ, āvuso, sattānaṃ… sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsadhammānaṃ, āvuso, sattānaṃ evaṃ icchā uppajjati – ‘aho vata, mayaṃ na sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsadhammā assāma ; na ca, vata, no sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā āgaccheyyu’nti . Na kho panetaṃ icchāya pattabbaṃ. Idampi – ‘yampicchaṃ na labhati tampi dukkhaṃ’’’.
「诸友!什么是所求不得也是苦?诸友!具生法的众生生起这样的欲求:『啊!愿我们不具生法;愿生不来到我们!』然而这不能以欲求而得。这也是『所求不得也是苦』。诸友!具老法的众生……诸友!具病法的众生……诸友!具死法的众生……诸友!具愁、悲、苦、忧、恼法的众生生起这样的欲求:『啊!愿我们不具愁、悲、苦、忧、恼法;愿愁、悲、苦、忧、恼不来到我们!』然而这不能以欲求而得。这也是『所求不得也是苦』。」
‘‘Katame cāvuso, saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā? Seyyathidaṃ – rūpupādānakkhandho, vedanupādānakkhandho, saññupādānakkhandho, saṅkhārupādānakkhandho, viññāṇupādānakkhandho. Ime vuccantāvuso – ‘saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’. Idaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ’’’.
「诸友!什么是简而言之五取蕴是苦?即:色取蕴、受取蕴、想取蕴、行取蕴、识取蕴。诸友!这些被称为『简而言之五取蕴是苦』。诸友!这被称为『苦圣谛』。」
§374
‘‘Katamañcāvuso, dukkhasamudayaṃ ariyasaccaṃ? Yāyaṃ taṇhā ponobbhavikā nandīrāgasahagatā tatratatrābhinandinī, seyyathidaṃ – kāmataṇhā bhavataṇhā vibhavataṇhā , idaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘dukkhasamudayaṃ ariyasaccaṃ’’’.
「诸友!什么是苦集圣谛?凡那导致再有的、与喜和贪俱行的、于处处而喜乐的渴爱,即:欲爱、有爱、无有爱,诸友!这被称为『苦集圣谛』。」
‘‘Katamañcāvuso, dukkhanirodhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ? Yo tassāyeva taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayo, idaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘dukkhanirodhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ’’’.
「诸友!什么是苦灭圣谛?凡那渴爱的无余离贪、灭、舍弃、舍离、解脱、无执著,诸友!这被称为『苦灭圣谛』。」
§375
‘‘Katamañcāvuso, dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasaccaṃ? Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, seyyathidaṃ – sammādiṭṭhi, sammāsaṅkappo, sammāvācā, sammākammanto, sammāājīvo, sammāvāyāmo, sammāsati, sammāsamādhi.
「诸贤友,什么是导至苦灭之道圣谛?即此八支圣道,也就是:正见、正思惟、正语、正业、正命、正精进、正念、正定。
‘‘Katamācāvuso, sammādiṭṭhi? Yaṃ kho, āvuso, dukkhe ñāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudaye ñāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhe ñāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya ñāṇaṃ, ayaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘sammādiṭṭhi’’’.
「诸贤友,什么是正见?诸贤友,凡于苦之智、于苦集之智、于苦灭之智、于导至苦灭之道之智,诸贤友,这称为『正见』。
‘‘Katamo cāvuso, sammāsaṅkappo? Nekkhammasaṅkappo, abyāpādasaṅkappo , avihiṃsāsaṅkappo, ayaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘sammāsaṅkappo’’’.
「诸贤友,什么是正思惟?出离思惟、无嗔思惟、无害思惟,诸贤友,这称为『正思惟』。
‘‘Katamā cāvuso, sammāvācā? Musāvādā veramaṇī, pisuṇāya vācāya veramaṇī, pharusāya vācāya veramaṇī, samphappalāpā veramaṇī, ayaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘sammāvācā’’’.
「诸贤友,什么是正语?离妄语、离两舌、离粗恶语、离杂秽语,诸贤友,这称为『正语』。
‘‘Katamo cāvuso, sammākammantī? Pāṇātipātā veramaṇī, adinnādānā veramaṇī, kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī, ayaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘sammākammanto’’’.
「诸贤友,什么是正业?离杀生、离不与取、离欲邪行,诸贤友,这称为『正业』。
‘‘Katamo cāvuso, sammāājīvo? Idhāvuso, ariyasāvako micchāājīvaṃ pahāya sammāājīvena jīvikaṃ kappeti, ayaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘sammāājīvo’’’.
「诸贤友,什么是正命?诸贤友,于此,圣弟子舍断邪命,以正命营生,诸贤友,这称为『正命』。
‘‘Katamo cāvuso, sammāvāyāmo? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu anuppannānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppādāya chandaṃ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṃ ārabhati cittaṃ paggaṇhāti padahati, uppannānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ pahānāya chandaṃ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṃ ārabhati cittaṃ paggaṇhāti padahati, anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ uppādāya chandaṃ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṃ ārabhati cittaṃ paggaṇhāti padahati, uppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ ṭhitiyā asammosāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā chandaṃ janeti vāyamati vīriyaṃ ārabhati cittaṃ paggaṇhāti padahati, ayaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘sammāvāyāmo’’’.
「诸贤友,什么是正精进?诸贤友,于此,比库为了未生之诸恶不善法的不生起,生起欲,努力,激发精进,策励心,精勤;为了已生之诸恶不善法的断除,生起欲,努力,激发精进,策励心,精勤;为了未生之诸善法的生起,生起欲,努力,激发精进,策励心,精勤;为了已生之诸善法的住立、不忘失、增长、广大、修习、圆满,生起欲,努力,激发精进,策励心,精勤,诸贤友,这称为『正精进』。
‘‘Katamā cāvuso, sammāsati? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ. Vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati…pe… citte cittānupassī viharati… dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ, ayaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘sammāsati’’’.
「诸贤友,什么是正念?诸贤友,于此,比库于身随观身而住,热诚、正知、具念,调伏世间的贪忧。于诸受随观受而住……于心随观心而住……于诸法随观法而住,热诚、正知、具念,调伏世间的贪忧,诸贤友,这称为『正念』。
‘‘Katamo cāvuso, sammāsamādhi? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā ajjhattaṃ sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāvaṃ avitakkaṃ avicāraṃ samādhijaṃ pītisukhaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati…pe… tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ… viharati, ayaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘sammāsamādhi’. Idaṃ vuccatāvuso – ‘dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasaccaṃ’’’.
「诸友!什么是正定?诸友!于此,比库离诸欲,离诸不善法,有寻、有伺,离生喜、乐,具足住于初禅那;由于寻、伺的平息,内净,心一境性,无寻、无伺,定生喜、乐,具足住于第二禅那;由于喜的离去,他住于舍……(中略)……具足住于第三禅那……诸友!这称为『正定』。诸友!这称为『导至苦灭之道圣谛』。」
‘‘Tathāgatenāvuso, arahatā sammāsambuddhena bārāṇasiyaṃ isipatane migadāye anuttaraṃ dhammacakkaṃ pavattitaṃ appaṭivattiyaṃ samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā kenaci vā lokasmiṃ, yadidaṃ – imesaṃ catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkamma’’nti.
「诸友!如来、阿拉汉、正等正觉者在巴拉纳西仙人堕处鹿野苑转起无上法轮,此法轮不能被任何沙门、婆罗门、天人、魔、梵天或世间任何者所转回,即:对此四圣谛的宣说、教导、施设、建立、开显、分别论、阐明。」
Idamavoca āyasmā sāriputto. Attamanā te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti.
具寿沙利子说了此。那些比库们心满意足,欢喜具寿沙利子所说。
Saccavibhaṅgasuttaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ ekādasamaṃ.
分别论论经第十一完
12. Dakkhiṇāvibhaṅgasuttaṃ12. 布施分别经
§376
Evaṃ me sutaṃ – ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā sakkesu viharati kapilavatthusmiṃ nigrodhārāme. Atha kho mahāpajāpati gotamī navaṃ dussayugaṃ ādāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Ekamantaṃ nisinnā kho mahāpajāpati gotamī bhagavantaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘idaṃ me, bhante, navaṃ dussayugaṃ bhagavantaṃ uddissa sāmaṃ kantaṃ sāmaṃ vāyitaṃ. Taṃ me, bhante, bhagavā paṭiggaṇhātu anukampaṃ upādāyā’’ti. Evaṃ vutte, bhagavā mahāpajāpatiṃ gotamiṃ etadavoca – ‘‘saṅghe, gotami, dehi. Saṅghe te dinne ahañceva pūjito bhavissāmi saṅgho cā’’ti. Dutiyampi kho mahāpajāpati gotamī bhagavantaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘idaṃ me, bhante, navaṃ dussayugaṃ bhagavantaṃ uddissa sāmaṃ kantaṃ sāmaṃ vāyitaṃ. Taṃ me, bhante, bhagavā paṭiggaṇhātu anukampaṃ upādāyā’’ti. Dutiyampi kho bhagavā mahāpajāpatiṃ gotamiṃ etadavoca – ‘‘saṅghe, gotami, dehi. Saṅghe te dinne ahañceva pūjito bhavissāmi saṅgho cā’’ti. Tatiyampi kho mahāpajāpati gotamī bhagavantaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘idaṃ me, bhante, navaṃ dussayugaṃ bhagavantaṃ uddissa sāmaṃ kantaṃ sāmaṃ vāyitaṃ. Taṃ me, bhante, bhagavā paṭiggaṇhātu anukampaṃ upādāyā’’ti. Tatiyampi kho bhagavā mahāpajāpatiṃ gotamiṃ etadavoca – ‘‘saṅghe, gotami, dehi . Saṅghe te dinne ahañceva pūjito bhavissāmi saṅgho cā’’ti.
如是我闻:一时,世尊住在释迦人中,咖毕拉瓦图的尼拘律园。尔时,摩诃巴阇波提·果德弥拿着新的一双衣,来到世尊处;到了之后,礼敬世尊,坐于一旁。坐于一旁的摩诃巴阇波提·果德弥对世尊如此说:「尊者!这是我为世尊而自己纺织、自己编织的新的一双衣。尊者!请世尊出于怜悯而接受我的。」如此说时,世尊对摩诃巴阇波提·果德弥如此说:「果德弥!布施给僧团。你布施给僧团时,我和僧团都将被供养。」第二次,摩诃巴阇波提·果德弥对世尊如此说:「尊者!这是我为世尊而自己纺织、自己编织的新的一双衣。尊者!请世尊出于怜悯而接受我的。」第二次,世尊对摩诃巴阇波提·果德弥如此说:「果德弥!布施给僧团。你布施给僧团时,我和僧团都将被供养。」第三次,摩诃巴阇波提·果德弥对世尊如此说:「尊者!这是我为世尊而自己纺织、自己编织的新的一双衣。尊者!请世尊出于怜悯而接受我的。」第三次,世尊对摩诃巴阇波提·果德弥如此说:「果德弥!布施给僧团。你布施给僧团时,我和僧团都将被供养。」
§377
Evaṃ vutte, āyasmā ānando bhagavantaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘paṭiggaṇhātu, bhante, bhagavā mahāpajāpatiyā gotamiyā navaṃ dussayugaṃ. Bahūpakārā , bhante, mahāpajāpati gotamī bhagavato mātucchā āpādikā posikā khīrassa dāyikā; bhagavantaṃ janettiyā kālaṅkatāya thaññaṃ pāyesi. Bhagavāpi, bhante, bahūpakāro mahāpajāpatiyā gotamiyā. Bhagavantaṃ, bhante, āgamma mahāpajāpati gotamī buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā, dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā, saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gatā. Bhagavantaṃ, bhante, āgamma mahāpajāpati gotamī pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭiviratā. Bhagavantaṃ, bhante, āgamma mahāpajāpati gotamī buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgatā , dhamme aveccappasādena samannāgatā, saṅghe aveccappasādena samannāgatā ariyakantehi sīlehi samannāgatā. Bhagavantaṃ, bhante, āgamma mahāpajāpati gotamī dukkhe nikkaṅkhā, dukkhasamudaye nikkaṅkhā, dukkhanirodhe nikkaṅkhā, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya nikkaṅkhā. Bhagavāpi, bhante, bahūpakāro mahāpajāpatiyā gotamiyā’’ti.
如此说时,具寿阿难对世尊如此说:「尊者!请世尊接受摩诃巴阇波提·果德弥的新的一双衣。尊者!摩诃巴阇波提·果德弥对世尊有大恩德,她是姨母、养育者、哺乳者;当世尊的生母去世时,她以乳汁哺育世尊。尊者!世尊对摩诃巴阇波提·果德弥也有大恩德。尊者!摩诃巴阇波提·果德弥依止世尊而归依佛,归依法,归依僧团。尊者!摩诃巴阇波提·果德弥依止世尊而离杀生,离不与取,离欲邪行,离妄语,离放逸之因的诸酒类。尊者!摩诃巴阇波提·果德弥依止世尊而具足对佛的证净,具足对法的证净,具足对僧团的证净,具足圣者所喜之诸戒。尊者!摩诃巴阇波提·果德弥依止世尊而对苦无疑惑,对苦集无疑惑,对苦灭无疑惑,对导至苦灭之道无疑惑。尊者!世尊对摩诃巴阇波提·果德弥有大恩德。」
§378
‘‘Evametaṃ , ānanda. Yaṃ hānanda, puggalo puggalaṃ āgamma buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, imassānanda, puggalassa iminā puggalena na suppatikāraṃ vadāmi, yadidaṃ – abhivādana-paccuṭṭhāna-añjalikamma sāmīcikammacīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilā- nappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānuppadānena.
「阿难!确实如此。阿难!若某人依止某人而归依佛,归依法,归依僧团,阿难!我说此人不能以礼敬、起迎、合掌、应作之事、衣、食、卧坐处、病者所需之医药资具的供养来充分回报此人。
‘‘Yaṃ hānanda, puggalo puggalaṃ āgamma pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā paṭivirato hoti, kāmesumicchācārā paṭivirato hoti, musāvādā paṭivirato hoti, surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti, imassānanda, puggalassa iminā puggalena na suppatikāraṃ vadāmi, yadidaṃ – abhivādana-paccuṭṭhāna-añjalikamma-sāmīcikammacīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilā- nappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānuppadānena.
「阿难!若某人依止某人而离杀生,离不与取,离欲邪行,离妄语,离放逸之因的诸酒类,阿难!我说此人不能以礼敬、起迎、合掌、应作之事、衣、食、卧坐处、病者所需之医药资具的供养来充分回报此人。
‘‘Yaṃ hānanda, puggalo puggalaṃ āgamma buddhe aveccappasādena samannāgato hoti, dhamme… saṅghe… ariyakantehi sīlehi samannāgato hoti, imassānanda, puggalassa iminā puggalena na suppatikāraṃ vadāmi, yadidaṃ – abhivādana-paccuṭṭhāna-añjalikamma-sāmīcikammacīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilā- nappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānuppadānena.
「阿难,凡是某人依某人而具足对佛的证净信,对法的……对僧团的……具足圣者所喜之戒,阿难,我说此人对此人不能以礼敬、起迎、合掌、恭敬业、衣、食、住所、病者所需之药品资具的供养来充分报答。
‘‘Yaṃ hānanda, puggalo puggalaṃ āgamma dukkhe nikkaṅkho hoti, dukkhasamudaye nikkaṅkho hoti, dukkhanirodhe nikkaṅkho hoti, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya nikkaṅkho hoti, imassānanda, puggalassa iminā puggalena na suppatikāraṃ vadāmi, yadidaṃ – abhivādana-paccuṭṭhānaañjalikamma-sāmīcikamma-cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilā- nappaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānuppadānena.
「阿难,凡是某人依某人而对苦无疑惑,对苦集无疑惑,对苦灭无疑惑,对导至苦灭之道无疑惑,阿难,我说此人对此人不能以礼敬、起迎、合掌、恭敬业、衣、食、住所、病者所需之药品资具的供养来充分报答。
§379
‘‘Cuddasa kho panimānanda, pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Katamā cuddasa? Tathāgate arahante sammāsambuddhe dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ paṭhamā pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Paccekasambuddhe dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ dutiyā pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Tathāgatasāvake arahante dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ tatiyā pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Arahattaphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ catutthī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Anāgāmissa dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ pañcamī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Anāgāmiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ chaṭṭhī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Sakadāgāmissa dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ sattamī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Sakadāgāmiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ aṭṭhamī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Sotāpanne dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ navamī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ dasamī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Bāhirake kāmesu vītarāge dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ ekādasamī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Puthujjanasīlavante dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ dvādasamī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Puthujjanadussīle dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ terasamī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇā. Tiracchānagate dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ cuddasamī pāṭipuggalikā dakkhiṇāti.
「阿难,有十四种对个人的布施。哪十四种?对如来、阿拉汉、正等正觉者布施——这是第一种对个人的布施。对辟支佛布施——这是第二种对个人的布施。对如来声闻阿拉汉布施——这是第三种对个人的布施。对为证得阿拉汉果而行道者布施——这是第四种对个人的布施。对阿那含布施——这是第五种对个人的布施。对为证得阿那含果而行道者布施——这是第六种对个人的布施。对萨咖达含布施——这是第七种对个人的布施。对为证得萨咖达含果而行道者布施——这是第八种对个人的布施。对须陀洹布施——这是第九种对个人的布施。对为证得须陀洹果而行道者布施——这是第十种对个人的布施。对外道中离欲者布施——这是第十一种对个人的布施。对凡夫持戒者布施——这是第十二种对个人的布施。对凡夫破戒者布施——这是第十三种对个人的布施。对畜生布施——这是第十四种对个人的布施。
‘‘Tatrānanda, tiracchānagate dānaṃ datvā sataguṇā dakkhiṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā, puthujjanadussīle dānaṃ datvā sahassaguṇā dakkhiṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā, puthujjanasīlavante dānaṃ datvā satasahassaguṇā dakkhiṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā, bāhirake kāmesu vītarāge dānaṃ datvā koṭisatasahassaguṇā dakkhiṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā, sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne dānaṃ datvā asaṅkheyyā appameyyā dakkhiṇā pāṭikaṅkhitabbā, ko pana vādo sotāpanne, ko pana vādo sakadāgāmiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne, ko pana vādo sakadāgāmissa, ko pana vādo anāgāmiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne, ko pana vādo anāgāmissa, ko pana vādo arahattaphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanne, ko pana vādo arahante, ko pana vādo paccekasambuddhe, ko pana vādo tathāgate arahante sammāsambuddhe!
「阿难,于此,对畜生布施后,可期待百倍的果报;对凡夫破戒者布施后,可期待千倍的果报;对凡夫持戒者布施后,可期待十万倍的果报;对外道中离欲者布施后,可期待亿十万倍的果报;对为证得须陀洹果而行道者布施后,可期待无数、无量的果报,何况对须陀洹,何况对为证得萨咖达含果而行道者,何况对萨咖达含,何况对为证得阿那含果而行道者,何况对阿那含,何况对为证得阿拉汉果而行道者,何况对阿拉汉,何况对辟支佛,何况对如来、阿拉汉、正等正觉者!
§380
‘‘Satta kho panimānanda, saṅghagatā dakkhiṇā. Katamā satta? Buddhappamukhe ubhatosaṅghe dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ paṭhamā saṅghagatā dakkhiṇā. Tathāgate parinibbute ubhatosaṅghe dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ dutiyā saṅghagatā dakkhiṇā. Bhikkhusaṅghe dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ tatiyā saṅghagatā dakkhiṇā. Bhikkhunisaṅghe dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ catutthī saṅghagatā dakkhiṇā. ‘Ettakā me bhikkhū ca bhikkhuniyo ca saṅghato uddissathā’ti dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ pañcamī saṅghagatā dakkhiṇā. ‘Ettakā me bhikkhū saṅghato uddissathā’ti dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ chaṭṭhī saṅghagatā dakkhiṇā. ‘Ettakā me bhikkhuniyo saṅghato uddissathā’ti dānaṃ deti – ayaṃ sattamī saṅghagatā dakkhiṇā.
「阿难,有七种对僧团的布施。哪七种?对以佛为首的两部僧团布施——这是第一种对僧团的布施。如来般涅槃后对两部僧团布施——这是第二种对僧团的布施。对比库僧团布施——这是第三种对僧团的布施。对比库尼僧团布施——这是第四种对僧团的布施。『请从僧团中为我指定这么多位比库和比库尼』而布施——这是第五种对僧团的布施。『请从僧团中为我指定这么多位比库』而布施——这是第六种对僧团的布施。『请从僧团中为我指定这么多位比库尼』而布施——这是第七种对僧团的布施。
‘‘Bhavissanti kho panānanda, anāgatamaddhānaṃ gotrabhuno kāsāvakaṇṭhā dussīlā pāpadhammā. Tesu dussīlesu saṅghaṃ uddissa dānaṃ dassanti. Tadāpāhaṃ, ānanda, saṅghagataṃ dakkhiṇaṃ asaṅkheyyaṃ appameyyaṃ vadāmi. Na tvevāhaṃ, ānanda, kenaci pariyāyena saṅghagatāya dakkhiṇāya pāṭipuggalikaṃ dānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ vadāmi.
「阿难,在未来世,将有破戒者、恶法者,他们是种姓破坏者、袈裟污染者。对那些破戒者,他们将对僧团布施。阿难,即使在那时,我也说对僧团的布施是无数、无量的。阿难,我绝不以任何方式说对个人的布施比对僧团的布施有更大的果报。
§381
‘‘Catasso kho imā, ānanda, dakkhiṇā visuddhiyo. Katamā catasso? Atthānanda, dakkhiṇā dāyakato visujjhati no paṭiggāhakato. Atthānanda, dakkhiṇā paṭiggāhakato visujjhati no dāyakato. Atthānanda, dakkhiṇā neva dāyakato visujjhati no paṭiggāhakato. Atthānanda, dakkhiṇā dāyakato ceva visujjhati paṭiggāhakato ca.
「阿难,有这四种布施的清净。哪四种?阿难,有布施从施者方面清净而非从受者方面。阿难,有布施从受者方面清净而非从施者方面。阿难,有布施既非从施者方面清净也非从受者方面。阿难,有布施从施者方面清净也从受者方面清净。
‘‘Kathañcānanda, dakkhiṇā dāyakato visujjhati no paṭiggāhakato? Idhānanda, dāyako hoti sīlavā kalyāṇadhammo, paṭiggāhakā honti dussīlā pāpadhammā – evaṃ kho, ānanda, dakkhiṇā dāyakato visujjhati no paṭiggāhakato.
「阿难,如何布施从施者方面清净而非从受者方面?阿难,于此,施者是持戒者、善法者,受者是破戒者、恶法者——阿难,如此布施从施者方面清净而非从受者方面。
‘‘Kathañcānanda, dakkhiṇā paṭiggāhakato visujjhati no dāyakato? Idhānanda, dāyako hoti dussīlo pāpadhammo, paṭiggāhakā honti sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā – evaṃ kho, ānanda, dakkhiṇā paṭiggāhakato visujjhati no dāyakato.
「阿难,如何布施从受者方面清净而非从施者方面?阿难,这里,施者是破戒者、恶法者,受者是持戒者、善法者——阿难,如此,布施从受者方面清净而非从施者方面。
‘‘Kathañcānanda, dakkhiṇā neva dāyakato visujjhati no paṭiggāhakato? Idhānanda, dāyako ca hoti dussīlo pāpadhammo, paṭiggāhakā ca honti dussīlā pāpadhammā – evaṃ kho, ānanda, dakkhiṇā neva dāyakato visujjhati no paṭiggāhakato.
「阿难,如何布施既非从施者方面清净也非从受者方面?阿难,这里,施者是破戒者、恶法者,受者也是破戒者、恶法者——阿难,如此,布施既非从施者方面清净也非从受者方面。
‘‘Kathañcānanda, dakkhiṇā dāyakato ceva visujjhati paṭiggāhakato ca? Idhānanda, dāyako ca hoti sīlavā kalyāṇadhammo, paṭiggāhakā ca honti sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā – evaṃ kho, ānanda, dakkhiṇā dāyakato ceva visujjhati paṭiggāhakato ca. Imā kho, ānanda, catasso dakkhiṇā visuddhiyo’’ti.
「阿难,如何布施从施者方面清净也从受者方面清净?阿难,这里,施者是持戒者、善法者,受者也是持戒者、善法者——阿难,如此,布施从施者方面清净也从受者方面清净。阿难,这些是四种布施的清净。」
Idamavoca bhagavā. Idaṃ vatvāna sugato athāparaṃ etadavoca satthā –
世尊说了这些。说了这些之后,善逝、导师又说了这个:
‘‘Yo sīlavā dussīlesu dadāti dānaṃ,
「持戒者对破戒者施予布施,
Dhammena laddhaṃ supasannacitto;
以法所得,以极净信之心;
Abhisaddahaṃ kammaphalaṃ uḷāraṃ,
深信殊胜的业果,
Sā dakkhiṇā dāyakato visujjhati.
此布施从施者方面清净。
‘‘Yo dussīlo sīlavantesu dadāti dānaṃ,
「若破戒者对持戒者布施供养,
Adhammena laddhaṃ appasannacitto;
以非法所得,心须跋信;
Anabhisaddahaṃ kammaphalaṃ uḷāraṃ,
不信业果广大,
Sā dakkhiṇā paṭiggāhakato visujjhati.
该供养从受施者方面得清净。
‘‘Yo dussīlo dussīlesu dadāti dānaṃ,
若破戒者对破戒者布施供养,
Adhammena laddhaṃ appasannacitto;
以非法所得,心须跋信;
Anabhisaddahaṃ kammaphalaṃ uḷāraṃ,
不信业果广大,
Na taṃ dānaṃ vipulapphalanti brūmi.
我说该布施非大果。」
‘‘Yo sīlavā sīlavantesu dadāti dānaṃ,
「具戒者对诸具戒者布施,
Dhammena laddhaṃ supasannacitto;
如法获得,心极净信;
Abhisaddahaṃ kammaphalaṃ uḷāraṃ,
深信殊胜的业果,
Taṃ ve dānaṃ vipulapphalanti brūmi .
我说此布施果报广大。
‘‘Yo vītarāgo vītarāgesu dadāti dānaṃ,
「离贪者对诸离贪者布施,
Dhammena laddhaṃ supasannacitto;
如法获得,心极净信;
Abhisaddahaṃ kammaphalaṃ uḷāraṃ,
深信殊胜的业果,
Taṃ ve dānaṃ āmisadānānamagga’’ nti.
此布施确实是诸物施中最上。」
Dakkhiṇāvibhaṅgasuttaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ dvādasamaṃ. · 布施分别经完,第十二
Vibhaṅgavaggo niṭṭhito catuttho. · 分别品完,第四
Tassuddānaṃ –
其摄颂——
Bhaddekānandakaccāna, lomasakaṅgiyāsubho;
跋德咖、阿难、咖吒亚那、卢马萨咖、昂其亚、须跋;
Mahākammasaḷāyatanavibhaṅgā, uddesaaraṇā dhātu saccaṃ.
大业、六处、分别论、总说、界、谛。
Dakkhiṇāvibhaṅgasuttanti. · 布施分别经